kia, the company · kia, the company Now that you are the owner of a Kia Vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of questions about your vehicle and the company like

kia, the company

Now that you are the owner of a Kia Vehicle, you’ll probably beasked a lot of questions about your vehicle and the company like“What is a Kia?,” “Who is Kia?,” “What does ‘Kia’ mean?”

Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company inKorea. It’s a company that has thousands of employees focusedon building high-quality vehicles at affordable prices.

The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from tothe world” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syl-lable, a, means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from”or “to come up out of Asia to the world.”

Enjoy your Vehicle!

i

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.When you require service, remember that your dealerknows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trainedtechnicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kiareplacement parts and is dedicated to your complete sat-isfaction.Because subsequent owners require this important infor-mation as well, this publication should remain with thevehicle if it is sold.This manual will familiarize you with operational, main-tenance and safety information about your new vehicle. Itis supplemented by a Warranty and Maintenance bookthat provides important information on all warrantiesregarding your vehicle. We urge you to read these publi-cations carefully and follow the recommendations to helpassure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.Kia offers a great variety of options, components and fea-tures for its various models.Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, alongwith the various illustrations, may not all be applicable toyour particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this man-ual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves theright to discontinue or change specifications or design atany time without notice and without incurring any obli-gation. If you have questions, always check with yourKia Dealer.We assure you of our continuing interest in your motor-ing pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.

© 2006 Kia Motors.All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, elec-tronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording,or by any information storage and retrieval system ortranslation in whole or part is not permitted without writ-ten authorization from Kia Motors.

Foreword

ii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Knowing your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

Driving tips

In case of an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications

Index

table of contents

1How to use this manual / 1-2Vehicle run-in process / 1-3

Introduction

Introduction

21

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from yourvehicle. Your Owner’s Manual canassist you in many ways. We strong-ly recommend that you read theentire manual. Especially, in order tominimize the chance of death orinjury, you must read the WARNINGand CAUTION sections spreadthroughout the manual.Illustrations complement the wordsin this manual to best explain how toenjoy your vehicle. By reading yourmanual, you learn about features,important safety information, anddriving tips under various road condi-tions.

The general layout of the manual isprovided in the Table of Contents. Agood place to start is the index; it hasan alphabetical listing of all informa-tion in your manual.Sections: This manual has eight sec-tions plus an index. Each sectionbegins with a brief list of contents soyou can tell at a glance if that sectionhas the information you want.

You’ll find various WARNING’s,CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in thismanual. These were prepared toenhance your personal safety. Youshould carefully read and follow ALLprocedures and recommendationsprovided in these WARNING’s,CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s.

✽✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting orhelpful information is being provid-ed.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situa-tion in which harm, serious bod-ily injury or death could result ifthe warning is ignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situationin which damage to your vehiclecould result if the caution isignored.

1 3

Introduction

No special run-in period is needed.By following a few simple precau-tions for the first 1,000 km (600miles) you may add to the perform-ance, economy and life of your vehi-cle.• Do not race the engine.• Do not maintain a single speed for

long periods of time, either fast orslow. Varying engine speed isneeded to properly run-in theengine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-gencies, to allow the brakes to seatproperly.

• Avoid full-throttle starts.

VEHICLE RUN-IN PROCESS

2Interior overview / 2-2Instrument panel overview / 2-3Engine compartment / 2-4



22

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Outside rearview mirror control switch (if equipped)

2. Power window switches (if equipped)

3. Vent controls

4. Instrument panel illumination (if equipped)

5. Instrument cluster

6. Cruise control (if equipped)

7. Steering wheel

8. Steering wheel tilt (if equipped)

9. Seat

10. Fuel filler lid release lever

11. Brake pedal

12. Inside rearview mirror

13. Bonnet release lever

OED026001R/OLD026018

2 3


INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Driver’s Air Bag (if equipped)

2. Light control / Turn signals

3. Instrument cluster

4. Wiper/Washer

5. Ignition switch

6. Trip computer / Information monitor (if equipped)

7. Audio controls (if equipped)

8. Seat warmer (if equipped)

9. Hazard

10. Climate control system

11. Shift lever

12. Power outlet

13. Passenger’s airbag (if equipped)

14. Glove box

OED026002R


42

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Air cleaner

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Radiator cap

9. Clutch fluid reservoir

10. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

11. Engine coolant reservoir

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.OED076001R

3

Keys / 3-2Remote keyless entry / 3-3Theft-alarm system / 3-5Immobiliser system / 3-7Door locks / 3-8Windows / 3-15

Seat / 3-20Seat belts / 3-30Air bag - supplemental restraint system / 3-53Bonnet / 3-77Fuel filler lid / 3-79Mirrors / 3-82Interior lights / 3-86Storage compartment / 3-87Interior features / 3-89Sunroof / 3-93Luggage net / 3-98Mounting bracket for roof carrier / 3-99Antenna / 3-100Audio system / 3-101



23

The key code number is stamped onthe plate attached to the key set.Should you lose your keys, this num-ber will enable an authorised KiaDealer to duplicate the keys easily.Remove the plate and store it in asafe place. Also, record the codenumber and keep it in a safe andhandy place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operations(1) Master key

Used to start the engine, lock andunlock the doors, and the rearhatch.

(2) Transmitter (if equipped)Used to lock and unlock the doorsand the rear hatch.

KEYS

OED036001

WARNING - Ignition key• Leaving children unattended

in a vehicle with the ignitionkey is dangerous even if thekey is not in the ignition.Children copy adults and theycould place the key in the igni-tion. The ignition key wouldenable children to operatepower windows or other con-trols, or even make the vehiclemove, which could result inserious bodily injury or evendeath. Never leave the keys inyour vehicle with unsuper-vised children.

• Use only Kia original parts forthe ignition key in your vehi-cle. If an aftermarket key isused, the ignition switch maynot return to ON after START.If this happens, the starter willcontinue to operate causingdamage to the starter motorand possible fire due to exces-sive current in the wiring.

OED036001A

3 3


(1) Lock ( )All doors are locked if the lockbutton is pressed.

(2) Unlock ( )All doors are unlocked if theunlock button is pressed.After depressing this button, thedoors will be locked automatical-ly unless you open them within30 seconds.

✽✽ NOTICEThe transmitter will not work if anyof following occur:- The ignition key is in ignition

switch.- You exceed the operating distance

limit (30 m).- The battery in the transmitter is

weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio stationor an airport which can interferewith normal operation of thetransmitter.

When the transmitter does not workcorrectly, open and close the doorwith the ignition key. If you have aproblem with the transmitter, con-tact an authorised Kia Dealer.

Operational distance may varydepending upon the area the trans-mitter is used in. For example, if thevehicle is parked near police sta-tions, government and public offices,broadcasting stations, military instal-lations, airports, or transmitting tow-ers, etc.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTIONKeep the transmitter away fromwater or any liquid. If the key-less entry system is inoperativedue to exposure to water or liq-uids, it will not be covered byyour manufacturer vehicle war-ranty.

OED036002


43

Battery replacementTransmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-tery which will normally last for sev-eral years. When replacement isnecessary, use the following proce-dure.1. Remove the screw (1) using a

cross-tip screwdriver.2. Insert a slim tool into the slot and

gently pry open the transmittercentre cover (2).

3. Remove the battery cover (3).

4. Replace the battery with new one.When replacing the battery, makesure the battery positive “+” sym-bol faces up as indicated in theillustration.

5. Install the battery in the reverseorder of removal.

For replacement transmitters, see anAuthorised Kia Dealer for reprogram-ming.

OED036003

CAUTIONThe keyless entry system trans-mitter is designed to give youyears of troublefree use, howev-er it can malfunction if exposedto moisture or static electricity.If you are unsure how to useyour transmitter or replace thebattery, contact an authorisedKia dealer.

CAUTION• Using the wrong battery can

cause the transmitter to mal-function. Be sure to use thecorrect battery.

• To avoid damaging the trans-mitter, don't drop it, get it wet,or expose it to heat or sun-light.

3 5


Theft alarm system will not operatewhen the ignition key is in the ignitionswitch.If the doors are locked by the trans-mitter key, unlock the doors with thetransmitter.

Armed stageWhen the ignition switch is in the“LOCK” position, and key is not in theignition, the system will be armedand the hazard lights will flash oncewhen the following conditions aremet:• The bonnet, rear hatch and doors

are all closed and locked with thetransmitter.

• If a door or the rear hatch is notopened within approximately 30seconds after unlocking with thetransmitter, all doors will be lockedagain and theft alarm systemarmed.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not arm the system until all pas-sengers have left the vehicle. If thesystem is armed whilst a passen-ger(s) remains in the vehicle, thealarm may be activated when theremaining passenger(s) leave thevehicle. If any door (or rear hatch)or engine bonnet is opened within 30seconds after the system enters thearmed stage, the system is disarmedto prevent an unnecessary alarm.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTIONBefore leaving your vehicle,check if the hazard warninglights flash once, to see whetherthe vehicle entered the armedstage. If the hazard warninglights does not flash, the vehiclewill not operate the theft alarmsystem as it does not enter thearmed stage. Therefore, haveyour vehicle checked by anauthorised Kia dealer as soonas possible.

Armedstage

Theft alarmstage

Disarmedstage


63

Theft alarm stageThe alarm will be activated when:• Any door (or rearhatch) is opened

without using the transmitter.• The engine bonnet is opened.

The alarm sound and flash will beON for 30 seconds.

Disarmed stageThe armed stage will be deactivatedwhen:• The “ ” button on the transmit-

ter is pressed.After depressing unlock button,you must open the doors within 30seconds or all doors will be lockedagain and automatically placedinto the armed stage.

• The ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

The alarm will be deactivated when:• The lock ( ) or unlock ( ) but-

ton on the transmitter is pressed.• The ignition switch is in the “ON”

position for 30 seconds or more.• The engine starts by turning the

ignition key to the starting position.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the ignition key is in the ignitionswitch, the transmitter will not func-tion. Avoid trying to start the enginewith the alarm activated.

3 7


Your vehicle is equipped with anelectronic engine immobiliser systemto reduce the risk of unauthorisedvehicle use.The immobiliser system is comprisedof a small transponder in the ignitionkey and electronic devices inside thevehicle.With the immobiliser system, when-ever you insert your ignition key intothe ignition switch and turn it to ON,it checks and determines whetherthe ignition key is valid or not.If the key is determined to be valid,the engine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid,the engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobiliser sys-tem:Insert the ignition key into the keycylinder and turn it to the ON posi-tion.

To activate the immobiliser sys-tem:Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-tion. The immobiliser system acti-vates automatically. Without a validignition key for your vehicle, theengine will not start.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not usethe key with other immobiliser keysaround.Otherwise the engine may not startor may stop soon after it starts. Keepeach key separately not to have anymalfunction after you receive yournew vehicle.

IMMOBILISER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION The transponder in your ignitionkey is an important part of theimmobiliser system. It isdesigned to give years of trou-blefree service, however youshould avoid exposure to mois-ture, static electricity and roughhandling. Immobiliser systemmalfunction could occur.

CAUTION Do not change, alter or adjustthe immobiliser systembecause it could cause theimmobiliser system to malfunc-tion and should only be serv-iced by an authorised Kia deal-er.Malfunctions caused by improp-er alterations, adjustments ormodifications to the immobilis-er system are not covered byyour vehicle manufacturer war-ranty.


83

Operating door locks fromoutside the vehicle • Turn the key toward rear of vehicle

to unlock and toward front of vehi-cle to lock.

• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter key.

• Once the doors are unlocked, itmay be opened by pulling the doorhandle.

• When closing the door, push thedoor by hand. Make sure thatdoors are closed securely.

• If you lock/unlock the front doorwith a key, all vehicle doors willlock/unlock automatically.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the door is locked/unlocked multi-ple times in rapid succession witheither the vehicle key or door lockswitch, the system may stop operat-ing temporarily in order to protectthe circuit and prevent damage tosystem components.

In case of an emergency If the power door lock switch doesnot operate electrically, you can onlylock the door(s) with the ignition keyfrom the outside key hole.The doors without the outside keyhole, you can lock as follows;1. Open the door.2. Insert the key into the emergency

door lock hole and turn the keytoward the rear of the vehicle tolock.

3. Close the door securely.The rear hatch will lock and will notunlock if you close the rear hatchwhen the power door lock switchdoes not operate electrically.

DOOR LOCKS

OED036006/H

LockUnlock

CAUTIONAlways remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, closeall windows and lock all doorswhen leaving your vehicle unat-tended.

OED036094

Lock

Unlock

3 9


Operating door locks frominside the vehicleWith the door handle• Driver's side door

If the inner door handle of the frontdoor is pulled when the door islocked, the door will unlock andopen.

• Passenger's side doorIf the inner door handle is pulledonce when the door is locked, thedoor will unlock.If the inner door handle is pulledtwice, the door will open.

With central door lock switchIt is operated by depressing the doorlock switch.• When pushing the door lock

switch, all vehicle doors will lockand the indicator light on the switchwill illuminate.If any door is opened when theswitch is pushed, all doors will notlock.

• If any door is unlocked, the indica-tor of the door lock switch will blink.If you push the switch when theindicator is blinking, all doors willlock.

• When pushing the door lock switchagain, all vehicle doors will unlockand the indicator light on the switchwill not illuminate.

OED036008R OED036007R


103

WARNINGLeaving your vehicle unlockedcan invite theft or possible harmto you or others from someonehiding in your vehicle whilst youare gone. Always remove theignition key, engage the parkingbrake, close all windows andlock all doors when leaving yourvehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

An enclosed vehicle canbecome extremely hot, causingdeath or severe injury to unat-tended children or animals whocannot escape the vehicle.Furthermore, children mightoperate features of the vehiclethat could injure them, or theycould encounter other harm,possibly from someone gainingentry to the vehicle. Never leavechildren or animals unattendedin your vehicle.

Super lock system (if equipped)If you turn the key to the “LOCK”position or depress the “LOCK” but-ton on the transmitter to lock thedoors, the locked doors are notunlocked by other tools exceptunlocking with the key or transmitter.This feature is to prevent potentialintruders from opening the door.

WARNINGDo not lock the doors by superlocking with the key or thetransmitter with anybody left inthe vehicle. The passenger inthe vehicle cannot unlock thedoors with the inside handle orthe door lock switch. For exam-ple, if the door is locked with thetransmitter, the passenger inthe vehicle cannot unlock thedoor without the transmitter.

WARNING • The doors should always be

fully closed and locked whilstthe vehicle is in motion to pre-vent accidental opening of thedoor. Locked doors will alsodiscourage potential intruderswhen the vehicle stops orslows.

• Be careful when openingdoors and watch for vehicles,motorcycles, bicycles orpedestrians approaching thevehicle in the path of the door.Opening a door when some-thing is approaching cancause damage or injury.

3 11


Impact sensing door unlocksystemAll doors will be automaticallyunlocked when the impact is deliv-ered to impact sensors whilst theignition switch ON.However, the doors may not beunlocked when there are some prob-lems of mechanical door lock systemor battery.

Speed sensing door lock sys-temWhen the speed of the vehicle keepsabove 40 km/h for 1 second, it willautomatically lock all doors. Fordeactivation of this feature, contactan authorised Kia dealer.

Rear door child safety lockThe child safety lock is provided tohelp prevent children from acciden-tally opening the rear doors frominside the vehicle. The rear doorsafety locks should be used whenev-er children are in the vehicle.1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock locatedon the rear edge of the door to the“lock” position. When the childsafety lock is in the “lock ( )”position, rear door will not openwhen the inner door handle ispulled inside the vehicle.

3. Close the rear door.4. To open the rear door, pull the out-

side door handle (1) .Even though the doors may beunlocked, the rear door will not openby pulling the inner door handle (2)until rear door child safety lock isunlocked ( ).

OED036009


123

Rear hatchOpening the rear hatch• You can lock/unlock the latch (but

not release it) with the central doorlock system.

• If unlocked, the rear hatch can beopened by pressing the handle (1)and pulling the hatch up.

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors whilst the vehicle isin motion, they could fall outand be severely injured orkilled. To prevent children fromopening the rear doors from theinside, the rear door safetylocks should be used wheneverchildren are in the vehicle. OED036010

CAUTIONDo not put any heavy object onthe covering shelf. It may dam-age the covering shelf.

WARNING • Do not put any object on the

covering shelf. If the vehiclesuddenly stops or makes acurve, the object may injurepassengers.

• Watch out for the edge of thecovering shelf, when you areusing the luggage room. Youmay injure yourself.

3 13


Emergency rear hatch safetyreleaseYour vehicle is equipped with emer-gency rear hatch safety release leverlocated on the bottom of the rearhatch. When someone is inadver-tently locked in the luggage compart-ment, if the lever is pushed, the rearhatch latch mechanism is releasedand the rear hatch is opened bypushing backward.

Luggage room lamp (if equipped)Luggage room lamp turns on whenthe rear hatch is opened. It remainson until the rear hatch is securelyclosed.

✽✽ NOTICEMake sure to close the rear hatchsecurely. If it remains open whilstengine is not running, it may causebattery discharge because luggageroom lamp remains on.

OED036011

WARNING • For emergency, be fully aware

of the location of the emer-gency rear hatch safetyrelease lever in their vehicleand how to open the rearhatch if you are accidentallylocked in the luggage com-partment.

• No one should be allowed tooccupy the luggage compart-ment of the vehicle at anytime. The luggage compart-ment is a highly dangerouslocation in the event of acrash.

• Use the release lever for emer-gency only. Use extreme cau-tion whilst the vehicle is inmotion.

OED036074


143

✽✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates door lock

and door mechanisms may notwork properly due to freezing con-ditions.

• When jacking up the vehicle tochange a tyre or repair the vehicle,do not operate the rear hatch. Thiscould cause the rear hatch to closeimproperly.

WARNING - Rear hatchThe rear hatch swings upward.Make sure no objects or peopleare near the rear of the vehiclewhen opening the rear hatch.

CAUTIONMake certain that you close therear hatch before driving yourvehicle. Possible damage mayoccur to the rear hatch lift cylin-ders and attaching hardware ifthe rear hatch is not closedprior to driving.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the rear hatchopen, you will draw dangerousexhaust fumes into your vehiclewhich can cause serious injuryor death to vehicle occupants.If you must drive with the rearhatch open, keep the air ventsand all windows open so thatadditional outside air comesinto the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargoarea

Occupants should never ride inthe rear cargo area where norestraints are available. To avoidinjury in the event of an acci-dent or sudden stops, occu-pants should always be proper-ly restrained.

3 15


Power windows (if equipped)(1) Driver’s door power window

switch(2) Front passenger’s door power

window switch(3) Rear door (left) power window

switch (if equipped)(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch (if equipped)(5) Window opening and closing(6) Automatic power window

(if equipped) (7) Power window lock switch

• Power window timerThe power windows can be operatedfor approximately 30 seconds afterthe ignition key is removed or turnedto the ACC or LOCK position.However, if the front doors areopened, the power windows cannotbe operated even within the 30 sec-onds after the ignition key removal.

WINDOWS

OED036012R

Type A Type B Type C


163

Power windows (if equipped)The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to oper-ate. Each door has a power windowswitch that controls that door’s win-dow. However, the driver has a powerwindow lock switch which can blockthe operation of passenger windows.If you notice buffeting and pulsation(wind shock) with either side windowopen, you should open the oppositewindow slightly to reduce the condi-tion.

CAUTION• To prevent the power window

system from the possibility ofdamage, do not open or closetwo windows at the same time.This will also ensure thelongevity of the fuse.

• Never try to operate the mainswitch on the driver's doorand the individual door win-dow switch in opposing direc-tions at the same time. If thisis done, the window will stopand cannot be opened orclosed.

WARNING • Make sure heads and hands

are safely out of the waybefore closing a window.

• Do not allow children to playwith the power windows. Keepthe driver’s door power win-dow lock switch in the LOCKposition (depressed). Seriousinjury can result from uninten-tional window operation bythe child.

• Do not extend face or armsoutside through the windowopening whilst driving.

• Always double check to makesure all arms, hands and otherobstructions are safely out ofthe way before closing a win-dow

3 17


Window opening and closingType AThe driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all thewindows in the vehicle. To open orclose a window, press down (5) orpull up (5) the front portion of the cor-responding switch.

Type B - Automatic power windowdown (driver’s window, if equipped)

Depressing the power window switchmomentarily to the second detentposition (6) completely lowers thedriver’s window even when theswitch is released. To stop the win-dow at the desired position whilst thewindow is in operation, pull up theswitch momentarily to the oppositedirection of the window movement.

Type C - Automatic power windowDepressing or pulling up the powerwindow switch momentarily to thesecond detent position (6) complete-ly lowers or lifts the window evenwhen the switch is released. To stopthe window at the desired positionwhilst the window is in operation, pullup or depress the switch momentari-ly to the opposite direction of the win-dow movement.

OED036085R

Type B

OED036086R

Type C

OED036084R

Type A


183

Automatic window reversal (Whenwindow is closed by the automaticpower window)If the upward movement of the win-dow is blocked by an object or part ofthe body, the window will detect theresistance and will stop upwardmovement. The window will thenlower approximately 30cm (11.8 in)from the top to allow the object to becleared.

If the automatic power window sys-tem does not operate properly, youmay reset as follows:1. Turn the ignition key to ON posi-

tion.2. Close each window and continue

pulling up on each power windowswitch for at least 0.5 second afterthe window is completely closed.

OED036087/H

WARNING• The automatic window reversal

feature will only operate whenthe automatic power windowoperation feature is used.Automatic window reversal willnot operate if the window israised using the first detentposition (5) on the power win-dow switch. Always doublecheck to make sure all faces,arms, hands and other obstruc-tions are safely out of the wayof before operating the powerwindow.

• If an object less than 4 mm indiameter is caught between thewindow glass and the upperwindow channel, the automaticreversal may not detect theresistance and will not operate.Therefore, always check for anyobstructions before raising anywindow.

3 19


Power window lock switch (if equipped)• The driver can disable the power

window switches on a rear passen-ger door by depressing the powerwindow lock switch located on thedriver’s door to LOCK (pressed).

• When the power window lockswitch is ON, the driver’s mastercontrol cannot operate the rearpassenger door power windowseither.

Manual windows (if equipped)Use the window crank to open andclose each window.

OED036013R OED036088


203

Driver’s seat(1) Seat adjustment, forward / back-

ward(2) Seatback recliner(3) Seat adjustment, height*(4) Seat warmer*(5) Lumbar support*(6) Headrest adjustment

Front passenger seat(7) Seat adjustment, forward /

backward (8) Seatback recliner(9) Seat warmer*(10) Lumbar support*(11) Headrest adjustment

Rear seat(12) Split folding rear seat(13) Armrest*(14) Headrest adjustment* ; if equipped

SEAT

OED036014R

3 21


(Continued)• Always drive and ride with

your seatback upright and thelap portion of the seat belt, orlap belt, snug and low acrossthe hips. This position putsyour seat belts in the bestposition to protect you in caseof an accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessaryair bag injuries including thepossibility of severe injury ordeath, always sit as far backas possible from the steeringwheel so that your chest isaway at least 250 mm (10 inch-es) away from the steeringwheel.

WARNING• Loose objects in the driver’s

foot area could interfere withthe operation of the foot ped-als, possibly causing an acci-dent. Loose objects mightinterfere with the seat slidemechanism. Do not place any-thing under the front seats.

• Children should never be leftunattended in the car.

WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never attempt to adjust seat

whilst the vehicle is moving.This could result in loss ofcontrol, and an accident caus-ing death, serious injury, orproperty damage.

• Do not allow anything to inter-fere with the normal positionof the seatback. Storing itemsagainst a seatback or in anyother way interfering withproper locking of a seatbackcould result in serious or fatalinjury in a sudden stop or col-lision.

(Continued)


223

Front seat adjustmentAdjusting the seat forward andbackwardTo move the seat forward or back-ward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment

lever under the front edge of theseat cushion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make surethe seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, andmake sure the seat is locked secure-ly by trying to move forward andbackward without using the controlknob. If the seat moves, it is notlocked properly.

Adjusting height of the driver’sseat cushion (if equipped)Pivot the lever upward to raise theseat cushion.Pivot the lever downward to lower theseat cushion.

OED036015R OED036016R

3 23


Adjusting the seatback reclinerTo recline the seatback, rotate theknob forward or rearward to thedesired angle.

Lumbar support (if equipped) You can adjust the lumbar support bymoving the lever on the side of seat-back.Pivoting the lever toward the front ofthe vehicle increases the lumbarsupport.Pivoting the lever toward the rear ofthe vehicle decreases the lumbarsupport.

OED036017R OED036018R

WARNINGDriving or riding in a vehiclewith a front seatback reclinedcould lead to serious or fatalinjury in an accident. If a frontseat is reclined during an acci-dent, the occupant’s hips mayslide under the lap portion ofthe seat belt applying greatforce to the unprotectedabdomen or neck. Serious orfatal internal injuries couldresult. Keep the seatbacks in acomfortably upright positionwhenever the vehicle is inmotion.


243

Seat warmer (if equipped)The front seats can be electricallyheated individually when the ignitionswitch is ON. When you depress theseat warmer switch, a thermostatregulates seat temperature. Eachtime you push the button the temper-ature setting of the seat changes. Todeactivate the heating system,depress the switch until the indicatorlight on the button turns off.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the seat warmer doesn't work

when the ambient temperature isbelow 21 °C (70 °F), have the sys-tem checked by an authoriseddealer.

• When cleaning the seats, do notuse an organic solvent such asthinner, benzene, alcohol andpetrol. Doing so may damage thesurface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seatwarmer, do not place blankets,cushions or seat covers on theseats whilst the seat warmer is inoperation.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on seats equipped withseat warmers. Damage to the seatwarming components could occur.

WARNINGPassengers should use extremecaution when using seat warm-ers due to the possibility ofexcess heating or burns. In par-ticular, the following types ofpassengers should exerciseextreme care:1. Infants, children, elderly or

handicapped persons, or hos-pital outpatients

2. Persons with sensitive skin orthose that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills,cold tablets, etc.)

OED036019R

3 25


Headrest adjustmentAdjusting the height up and downThe headrest not only provides com-fort for the driver and passengers,but also helps to protect the headand neck in the event of a collision.

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower theheadrest, push and hold the releasebutton (2) on the headrest supportand lower the headrest to the desiredposition (3). For best protection,adjust the headrest so its centre is ashigh as your ears. Also adjust theheadrest so its distance from thehead is as wide as your fist.

RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it asfar as it can go then press therelease lever (1) whilst pullingupward (2).If the vehicle is equipped with anactive headrest, you can not removethe headrest.

Active headrest (if equipped)The active headrest is designed tomove forward and upward during arear impact. This helps to prevent thedriver's and front passenger’s headsfrom moving backward and thushelps prevent neck injuries.

OED036072 OED036073

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of head andneck injuries, do not drive thevehicle with the headrestremoved or improperly posi-tioned. Do not adjust the dri-ver’s headrest whilst driving.

HNF2041-1


263

Rear seat Split folding rear seat The rear seatbacks fold forward toprovide additional cargo space andto provide access to the cargo area.• To fold the rear seatback(s) down,

pull the lock release lever, then foldthe seatback forward and down.

• To raise the seatback, lift and pushit firmly until it clicks into place.

• When you return the seatback toits upright position, reposition therear seat belts so that they can beused by rear seat passengers.

1. Lift the front side of the seat cush-ion (1) up.

2. Lift the rear of seat cushion up (2).

3. Move the seat cushion firmly untilit clicks (3).

4. Remove the headrest (4).

OED036023

OED036024

OED036025

OED036026

3 27


CAUTION • When returning the rear seat-

backs to the upright position,remember to return the rearshoulder belts to their properposition.

• Do not remove the floor carpetin your vehicle. Emission con-trol system componentscause high exhaust tempera-tures under the floor.

WARNING - CargoCargo should always besecured to prevent it from beingthrown about the vehicle in acollision and causing injury tothe vehicle occupants.

5. Pull the lock release lever (5).6. Fold the seatback forward and

down firmly (6).7. Put the headrest poles into the

holes on the rear of the seat cush-ion (7).

To unfold the rear seat:1. Remove the headrest.2. Whilst slightly pushing the seat

cushion towards the front of thevehicle, lift and push the seatbackbackward firmly until it clicks intoplace.

3. Place the headrest to the properposition.

4. Move and push the seat cushiondownward firmly to the properposition.

5. Check the rear seat belt and buck-le.

OED036027

OED036028


283

Armrest (if equipped)The armrest is located in the centreof the rear seat. Pull the armrestdown from the seatback.

Headrest adjustment Adjusting the height up and downTo raise the headrest, pull it up untilit clicks into place (1). To lower theheadrest, push and hold the releasebutton (2) on the headrest supportand lower the headrest to the lowestposition (3).

CAUTION • Make sure the engine is off,

the transaxle is in P and theparking brake is appliedwhenever loading or unload-ing cargo. Vehicle may move ifshift lever is inadvertentlymoved to another position.

• Be careful when loading cargothrough the rear passengerseats to prevent damage tothe vehicle interior.

• When cargo is loaded throughthe rear passenger seats,ensure the cargo is properlysecured to prevent it frommoving whilst driving.Unsecured cargo in the pas-senger compartment cancause damage to the vehicleor injury to it’s occupants.

OED036089 OED036030

3 29


RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it asfar as it can go then press therelease lever (1) whilst pullingupward (2).

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of head andneck injuries, do not drive thevehicle with the headrestremoved or improperly posi-tioned.

OED036031


303

Pre-tensioner seat belt (if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensionerseat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that theseat belts fit tightly against the occu-pant's body in certain frontal colli-sions. The pre-tensioner seat beltscan be activated, where the frontalcollision is severe enough, togetherwith the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, orif the occupant tries to lean forwardtoo quickly, the seat belt retractor willlock into position. In certain frontalcollisions, the pre-tensioner will acti-vate and pull the seat belt into tightercontact against the occupant's body.If the system senses excessive seatbelt tension on the driver or passen-ger's seat belt when the pre-tension-er activates, the load limiter insidethe pre-tensioner will release someof the pressure on the affected seatbelt. (if equipped)

The seat belt pre-tensioner systemconsists mainly of the following com-ponents.Their locations are shown inthe illustration.(1) SRS air bag warning light(2) Seatbelt pre-tensioner assembly(3) SRS air bag control module

SEAT BELTS

OMG035300/H 1KMB3311A/H

3 31


WARNINGTo obtain maximum benefit froma pre-tensioner seat belt:• The seat belt must be worn

correctly.• The seat belt must be adjusted

to the correct position.

WARNINGWhen the pre-tensioner seatbelts are activated, a loud noisemay be heard and fine dust,which may appear to be smoke,may be visible in the passengercompartment and are not toxic.Although, it is harmless, the finedust may cause skin irritationand should not be breathed forprolonged periods. Wash yourhands and face thoroughly afteran accident in which the airbags and/or pre-tensioner seatbelts were activated.

CAUTION • Because the sensor that acti-

vates the SRS air bag is con-nected with pre-tensioner seatbelt, the SRS air bag warninglight on the instrument panelwill blink or illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds afterthe ignition key has beenturned to the “ON” position,then the light should go off.

• If the pre-tensioner seat belt isnot working properly, thiswarning light will illuminateeven if there is no malfunctionof SRS air bag system. If theSRS air bag warning lightdoes not illuminate when theignition key is turned to “ON” ,or if it remains illuminatedafter blinking or illuminatingfor approximately 6 seconds,or if it illuminates whilst thevehicle is being driven, pleasehave an authorised Kia dealerinspect the pre-tensioner seatbelt or SRS air bag system assoon as possible.


323

WARNING• Pre-tensioners are designed

to operate once. After activa-tion, pre-tensioner seat beltsmust be replaced. All seatbelts, of any type, shouldalways be replaced after theyhave been worn during a colli-sion.And driver’s and passenger’sseat belt should always bereplaced after a collisionalthough they have not beenworn during a collision.

• Do not attempt to inspect orreplace the pre-tensioner seatbelts yourself. This must bedone by an authorised Kiadealer.

WARNINGThe pre-tensioner seat beltassembly mechanisms becomehot during activation. Do nottouch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assembly for several min-utes after they have been acti-vated.

WARNING• Do not strike the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies.• Do not attempt to service or

repair the pre-tensioner seatbelt system in any manner.

• Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assem-blies, and failure to heed thewarnings not to strike, modify,inspect, place, service orrepair the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies may lead toimproper operation or inad-vertent activation causingserious injury.Always wear the seat beltswhen driving or riding in amotor vehicle.

3 33


Seat belt restraint system We strongly recommend that thedriver and all passengers be proper-ly restrained at all times by using theseat belts provided with the vehicle.Proper use of the seat belts decreas-es the risk of severe injury or deathin accidents or sudden stops.

All seats have lap/shoulder belts.Inertial locks in the seat belt retrac-tors allow all of the lap/shoulder seatbelts to remain unlocked during nor-mal vehicle operation.This allows theoccupants some freedom of move-ment and increased comfort whilstusing the seat belts. If a force isapplied to the vehicle, such as astrong stop, a sharp turn, or a colli-sion, the seat belt retractors willautomatically lock the seat belts.

Since the inertial locks do not requirea collision in order to lock up, youmay become aware of the seat beltslocking whilst braking or goingaround sharp corners.Always use the rear seat position(s)to install your child restraint(s).

Never install a child restraint systemin the front passenger position, as aninflating air bag could cause seriousor fatal injury to a child in that posi-tion.

WARNING - Seat beltsTo minimize the risk of seriousor fatal injury in an accident, thedriver and all passengersshould use the appropriatesafety restraints for their ageand size. The presence of airbags does not change the needto be properly restrained by aseat belt or size-appropriatechild restraint. In fact, air bagsare designed to work the bestwhen passengers are correctlyrestrained in the vehicle. Besure you are familiar with theinformation in this section,including the information oninfant and child restraints. Readthe safety warnings on the sunvisors of your vehicle also.


343

WARNING - Twisted beltsA twisted or jammed seat beltcannot restrain you properly. Ifyou cannot untwist or unjam theseat belt, have an authorisedKia dealer it immediately. Neverdrive or ride with a twisted orjammed seat belt.

Seat belts provide the best restraintwhen:• The seatback is upright.• The occupant is sitting upright (not

slouched).• The lap belt is snug across the hips.• The shoulder belt is snug across

the chest.• The knees are straight forward.To help you remember to fasten yourseat belt, a warning light will comeon and a chime will sound.

WARNING - After a colli-sion

• Lap/shoulder belt assembliesmay be stretched or damagedwhen subjected to the stressand forces of a collision.

• The entire restraint systemshould be inspected followingany collision. All belts, retrac-tors, anchors and hardwaredamaged by a collision shouldbe replaced before the vehicleis operated again.

WARNING - Cargo area (if equipped)

Passengers should never beallowed to ride in the cargo areaof a vehicle. No seat belts areprovided for the cargo area.Persons riding in the vehiclewithout a fastened seat belt aremuch more likely to suffer seri-ous bodily injury or death dur-ing an accident.

3 35


WARNING - Belt useSeat belts must be used correct-ly to work properly in an acci-dent. Each seating position inyour vehicle has a specific seatbelt assembly that includes abuckle and tongue designed tobe used together.For greatest effectiveness, fol-low these guidelines in usingseat belts:• Use the shoulder portion of

the seat belt on the outsideshoulder only. Never wear theshoulder portion under thearm.

• Never swing the seat beltaround your neck to fit overthe inside shoulder.

• Never wear the shoulder por-tion of the seat belt across theneck or face.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Wear the lap portion as low as

possible. Be sure that the lapbelt fits snugly around thehips. Never wear lap belt or alap portion of a lap/shoulderbelt over your waist; it shouldalways go over the strongerarea of your hips.

• Never use a single seat beltfor more than one person.

• The front seatbacks shouldalways remain in a comfort-able, upright position whenthe vehicle is moving.

WARNING - Seat belt care• A damaged belt may not give

you the protection you need inan accident.

• Inspect your seat belts period-ically for excessive wear ordamage. Pull out each beltfully and look for fraying, cuts,burns or other damage. Pullthe seat belt out and let itretract a number of times.Make sure that the lap/shoul-der belts return smoothly andeasily into the retractor.

• Check the latches to makesure they latch and releasewithout interference or delay.

• Never close the doors on anypart of the lap or shoulderbelt.

• Any belt not in good conditionor in good working ordershould be promptly replaced.


363

CAUTION Never close the doors on anypart of the lap or shoulder belt.It can damage the seat belt orbuckle which could increase therisk of injury in case of an acci-dent.

OED036090R

Seat belt warning light and chime(1) Driver’s seat belt warning light(2) Front passenger’s seat belt warning light(3) Rear left passenger’s seat belt warning light (if equipped)(4) Rear centre passenger’s seat belt warning light (if equipped)(5) Rear right passenger’s seat belt warning light (if equipped)

Type A Type B

3 37


Driver's and front passenger'sseat belt warning light and chimeAs a reminder to the driver and pas-senger, seat belt warning light willilluminate for approximately 6 sec-onds each time you turn the ignitionswitch ON.If the front seat is occupied, the seatbelt warning light and chime willoperate as follows;If the driver's and/or front passen-ger's lap/shoulder belt is not fas-tened when the key is turned ON orif it is disconnected after the key isturned ON, the corresponding seatbelt warning light will illuminate untilthe belt is fastened.If you continue not to fasten the seatbelt and you drive over 9km/h, theilluminated warning light will start toblink until you drive under 6km/h.

If you continue not to fasten the seatbelt and you drive over 20km/h forthe first time, the seat belt warningchime will sound for approximately100 seconds and the correspondingwarning light will blink.Also, when you unfasten your seatbelt and drive over 9 km/h for the firsttime, the warning chime will soundfor approximately 100 seconds.

Rear passenger's seat belt warn-ing light (if equipped)If the rear passenger's lap/shoulderbelt is not fastened when the key isturned ON(engine is not running) thecorresponding seat belt warning lightwill illuminate as red and if the belt isfastened the colour will change togreen.And then, if you start the engine anddrive under 9km/h, the correspondingwarning light will turn off after 35 sec-onds.If all rear passenger's seat belts arefasten, the green seat belt warninglights will turn off.If you drive over 9km/h, the correspon-ding warning light (fasten ; greencolour, unfasten ; red colour) will turnon and turn off after 35 seconds.If the rear seat belt is disconnectedwhen you drive over the 9km/h, thecorresponding seat belt warning lightwill blink for 35 seconds.But, if the rear passenger's lap/shoul-der belt is/are connected and discon-nected twice within 9 seconds after thebelt is fastened, the correspondingseat belt warning light will not operate.


383

Lap/shoulder beltTo fasten the front lap/shoulderbelt:1. Grasp the buckle and tongue

plate.2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt

out from the retractor.

3. Insert the tongue plate (1) into theopen end of the buckle (2) until anaudible “click” is heard, indicatingthe belt is locked in the buckle.

4. Position the lap portion (1) of thebelt across your lap as LOW ONTHE HIPS as possible to reducethe risk of sliding under it duringan accident. Adjust the belt to aSNUG FIT by pulling up on theshoulder portion (2) of the seatbelt. The belt retractor is designedto take up excess webbing auto-matically and to maintain tensionon the belt. For your safety, do notput any excess slack into the seatbelt at any location.

OMG035302 OMG035303OMG035301

3 39


5. Adjust the shoulder anchor posi-tion to your size. To raise theanchor position, push the anchorup (1). To lower the anchor posi-tion, press (2) the button and slidethe anchor down (3). After adjust-ment, make sure the anchor islocked in position.

To unfasten the front lap/shoulderbelt:Press the release button on thebuckle and allow the belt to slowlyretract.

OMG035304

WARNING• The seatbacks should always

remain in a comfortable,upright position whilst thevehicle is in motion. The seatbelt system will provide themost protection with the seat-backs in an upright position.

• Never wear the shoulder por-tion of the seat belt under theoutside arm or behind theback.


• Wear the lap portion of theseat belt as low on the hips aspossible. Be sure the lap beltfits snugly around the hips.Never wear the lap belt overyour waist.

(Continued)

OMG035038


403

Rear lap/shoulder belt To fasten the rear lap/shoulderbelt:1. Grasp the buckle and tongue

plate.2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt

out.3. Insert the tongue plate (1) into the

open end of the buckle (2) until anaudible “click’’ is heard, indicatingthe belt is locked in the buckle.

4. Position the lap portion (1) of thebelt across your lap as LOW ONTHE HIPS as possible to reducethe risk of sliding under it duringan accident. Adjust the belt to aSNUG FIT by pulling up on theshoulder portion (2) of the seatbelt. The belt retractor is designedto take up excess webbing auto-matically and to maintain tensionon the belt. For your safety do notput any excess slack into the seatbelt.

OMG035302 OMG035303

(Continued)• Never drive or ride with a

twisted or jammed seat belt. Ifyou cannot untwist or unjamthe seat belt, see the nearestKia dealer immediately.

• Never use a single belt torestrain more than one personat a time.

Failure to follow these warningswill increase the risk and sever-ity of injury in an accident.

3 41


To unfasten:Press the release button on thebuckle and allow the belt to slowlyretract.

Proper use and care of theseat belt system To ensure that the seat belts providethe maximum protection, please fol-low these instructions:• Use the belts at all times - even on

short trips.• If the seat belt is twisted, straighten

it prior to use.• Keep sharp edges and damaging

objects away from the belts.• Periodically inspect belt webbing,

anchors, buckles and all otherparts for signs of wear and dam-age. Replace damaged, excessive-ly worn or questionable partsimmediately.

(Continued)• Never drive or ride with a

twisted or jammed seat belt. Ifyou cannot untwist or unjamthe seat belt, see the nearestKia dealer immediately.

• Never use a single belt torestrain more than one personat a time.

Failure to follow these warningswill increase the risk and sever-ity of injury in an accident.

WARNING• Never wear the shoulder por-

tion of the seat belt under theoutside arm or behind theback.


• Wear the lap portion of theseat belt as low as possible.Be sure the lap belt fits snug-ly around the hips. Never wearthe lap belt over your waist.

(Continued)


423

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must neverplace the lap portion of the seatbelt over the area of theabdomen where the fetus islocated or above the abdomenwhere the belt could crush thefetus during an impact.

• To clean the belt webbing, use amild soap solution recommendedfor cleaning upholstery or carpets.Follow the instructions providedwith the soap.

• Do not make modifications or addi-tions to the seat belt.

• After wearing a seat belt, makesure it fully retracts to the stowedposition. Do not allow the belt toget caught in the door when youclose it.

Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wearlap/shoulder belt assemblies when-ever possible according to specificrecommendations by their doctors.The lap portion of the belt should beworn AS SNUGLY AND LOW ASPOSSIBLE.

Restraint of infants and smallchildren To increase their safety, infants andyoung children should always berestrained by a restraint systemapproved for their age and size.Never allow a child to stand or kneelon the seat of a moving vehicle.Never allow a seat belt to be placedaround both a child and an adult oraround two children at the sametime.It is best for children to be seated inthe rear seats.WARNING

Do not bleach or dye the web-bing because this may weakenthe webbing fibers and allowthem to fail when loaded in acollision.

3 43


Many companies manufacture childrestraint systems (often called childseats) for infants and small children.An acceptable child restraint systemmust always satisfy the SafetyStandards of your country. Makesure that any child-restraint systemyou use in your vehicle is labelled ascomplying with those safety stan-dards.The child-restraint system should bechosen to fit both the size of the childand the size of the vehicle seat. Besure to follow any instructions provid-ed by the child-restraint system man-ufacturer when installing the child-restraint system.

Restraint of larger children As children grow, they may need touse new child-restraint systems,including larger child seats or boost-er seats, which are appropriate fortheir increased size.A child who has outgrown availablechild-restraint systems should usethe belts provided in the vehicle.When seated in the rear outboardseats, the child should be restrainedby the lap/shoulder belt.If the shoulder belt portion slightlytouches the child’s neck or face, tryplacing the child closer to the centreof the vehicle. If the shoulder belt stilltouches their face or neck they mayneed to be returned to a childrestraint system. In addition, after-market devices are available fromindependent manufacturers whichhelp pull the shoulder belt down andaway from the child’s face or neck.

WARNING - Children onlaps

Never hold a child on your lap orin your arms in a moving vehi-cle.Even a very strong person can-not hold onto a child in theevent of even a minor collision.

CAUTION - Hot metalparts

Seat belts and seats canbecome hot in a vehicle that hasbeen closed during warm/hotweather; they could burn achild. Check seat covers andbuckles before you place a childanywhere near them.


443

Child restraint system (if equipped)For small children and babies, theuse of a child seat or infant seat isstrongly recommended. This childseat or infant seat should be ofappropriate size for the child andshould be installed in accordancewith the manufacturer's instructions.It is further recommended that theseat be placed in the vehicle's rearseat since this can make an impor-tant contribution to safety.Children riding in the car should siton the rear seat and must always beproperly restrained to minimize therisk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden manoeuvre.According to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than inthe front seat. Larger children shoulduse one of the seat belts provided.

You are required by law to use safe-ty restraints for children. If small chil-dren ride in your vehicle you mustput them in a child restraint system(safety seat).Children could be injured or killed ina crash if their restraints are notproperly secured. For small childrenand babies, a child seat or infant seatmust be used. Before buying a par-ticular child restraint system, makesure it fits your car and seat belts,and fits your child. Follow all theinstructions provided by the manu-facturer when installing the childrestraint system.

WARNING - Shoulderbelts on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt tobe in contact with a child’sneck or face whilst the vehicleis in motion.

• If seat belts are not properlyworn and adjusted, there is arisk of death or serious injuryto such a child.

3 45


1JBH3051

WARNING• A child restraint system must

be placed in the rear seat.Never install a child or infantseat on the front passenger'sseat.Should an accident occur andcause the passenger air bagto deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or childseat. Thus, only use a childrestraint in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Always make sure that the

shoulder belt portion of theoutboard lap/shoulder belt ispositioned midway over theshoulder, never across theneck or behind the back.Moving the child closer to thecentre of the vehicle may helpprovide a good shoulder beltfit. The lap belt portion of thelap/shoulder belt must alwaysbe positioned as low as possi-ble on the child's hips and assnug as possible.

• If the seat belt will not proper-ly fit the child, we recommendthe use of an approved boost-er seat in the rear seat in orderto raise the child's seatingheight so that the seat belt willproperly fit the child.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Since a seat belt or child

restraint system can becomevery hot if it is left in a closedvehicle, be sure to check theseat cover and buckles beforeplacing a child there.

• When the child restraint sys-tem is not in use, store it in theboot or fasten it with a seatbelt so that it will not bethrown forward in the case ofa sudden stop or an accident.

• Children who are too large tobe in a child restraint shouldsit in the rear seat and berestrained with the availablelap/shoulder belts. Neverallow children to ride in thefront passenger seat.

(Continued)


463

Installation on the rear seatsWARNING

• Do not install any childrestraint system in the frontpassenger seat. Should anaccident occur and cause thepassenger air bag to deploy, itcould severely injure or kill aninfant or child seated in aninfant or child seat. Therefore,only use a child restraint sys-tem in the rear seat of yourvehicle.

• If the child restraint seat is notanchored properly, the risk ofa child being seriously injuredor killed in a collision greatlyincreases.

WARNING• Before installing the child

restraint system, read theinstructions supplied by thechild restraint system manu-facturer.

• Failure to observe this manualinstructions regarding childrestraint system and theinstructions provided with thechild restraint system couldincrease the chance and/orseverity of injury in an acci-dent.

(Continued)• Never allow a child to stand up

or kneel on the seat.• Never allow a child to be held

in a person's arms whilst theyare in a moving vehicle, asthis could result in seriousinjury to the child in the eventof an accident or a suddenstop. Holding a child in a mov-ing vehicle does not providethe child with any means ofprotection during an accident,even if the person holding thechild is wearing a seat belt.

3 47


Installing a child restraint system bylap/shoulder belt (on the rear seat) To install a child restraint system onthe rear seats, do the following:1. Place the child restraint system in

the desired position.2. Extend the shoulder/lap belt from

its retractor.

3. Route the lap/shoulder beltthrough the restraint according tothe seat manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

4. Buckle the seat belt and allow theseat belt to take up any slack. Afterinstallation of the child restraintsystem, try to move it in all direc-tions to be sure the child restraintsystem is securely installed.

If you need to tighten the belt, pullmore webbing toward the retractor.

E2MS103005 MMSA3030E2BLD310


483

Child seat restraint suitability for seat position using the seat belt - For EuropeUse child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriatefor your children.When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.

Age group

0 : Up to 10 kg(0 - 9 months)

0+ : Up to 13 kg(0 - 2 years)

I :9 kg to 18 kg(9 months - 4 years)

II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg(4 - 12 years)

Front passenger

X

L1, L2

L3, L4, L5

L6, L7

Rear Outboard

U

U

U

U

Rear Centre

U

U

U

U

Seating position

U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group L1 : Suitable for PegPerego primo Viaggio (E13 030010) approved for the use in this

mass group L2 : Suitable for GRACO Autobaby (E11 0344160 / E11 0344161) approved for the use

in this mass group L3 : Suitable for Romer Lord Plus (E1 03301136) approved for use in this mass group L4 : Suitable for MAXI-COSI Priori XP (E1 03301153) approved for the use in this mass

group L5 : Suitable for BeSafe iZi COMFORT (E4 03443206) approved for use in this mass

groupL6 : Suitable for Euro Kids Star (E1 03301129) approved for use in this mass groupL7 : Suitable for Bebe comfort HiPSOS (E2 031011) approved for use in this mass groupX : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group

WARNINGWe recommend that a childrestraint seat be installed in therear seat, even if the front pas-senger's air bag ON/OFF switchis set to the OFF position. Toensure the safety of your child,the front passenger’s air bagmust be deactivated when itshould be necessary to install achild restraint seat on the frontpassenger seat in exceptionalcircumstances.

3 49


Securing a child restraint seatwith “Tether Anchor” system (if equipped) Child restraint hook holders arelocated on the transverse trim behindthe rear seats.

1. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable head-rest, route the tether strap underthe headrest and between theheadrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of theseatback.

2. Remove the covering shelf trimand place it in the luggage room.Make sure it does not move.

3. Connect the tether strap hook tothe belonging child restraint hookholder and tighten to secure theseat.

Securing a child restraint systemwith “ISOFIX” system and “TetherAnchorage” system (if equipped)ISOFIX is a standardised method offitting child seats that eliminates theneed to use the standard adult seatbelt to secure the seat in the vehicle.This enables a much more secureand positive location with the addedbenefit of easier and quicker installa-tion.An ISOFIX-seat can only be installedif it has vehicle-specific approval inaccordance with the requirements ofECE-R44.

OED036078OED036095


503

On each side of the rear seat,between the cushion and backrest,are located a pair of ISOFIX anchor-age points together with a top tethermounting on the back panel behindthe rear seats. During the installa-tion, the seat has to be engaged atthe anchorage-points in a way youcan hear it clicking (check by pulling!)and has to be fixed with the TopTether-belt on the belonging point onthe transverse trim behind rear seats.

The installing and the use of a child-seat has to be done according to theinstalling-manual, which is added tothe ISOFIX-seat.

To secure the child restraint seat1. To engage the child restraint seat

to the ISOFIX anchor, insert thechild restraint seat latch into theISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audi-ble “click” sound.

2. Connect the tether strap hook tothe child restraint hook holder andtighten to secure the seat. Refer tothe previous page.

WARNINGWhen using the vehicle's“ISOFIX” system to install achild restraint system in the rearseat, all unused vehicle rearseat belt metal latch plates ortabs must be latched securely intheir seat belt buckles and theseat belt webbing must beretracted behind the childrestraint to prevent the childfrom reaching and taking holdof unretracted seat belts.Unlatched metal latch plates ortabs may allow the child toreach the unretracted seat beltswhich may result in strangula-tion and a serious injury ordeath to the child in the childrestraint.

OED036077AOED036079

3 51


(Continued)• Do not mount more than one

child restraint to a childrestraint lower anchoragepoint. The improper increasedload may cause the anchoragepoints or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injuryor death.

• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seatonly to the appropriate loca-tions shown in the illustration.

• Always follow the installationand use instructions providedby the manufacturer of thechild restraint.

WARNING• Do not install a child restraint

seat at the centre of the rearseat using the vehicle'sISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIXanchors are only provided forthe left and right outboard rearseating positions. Do not mis-use the ISOFIX anchors byattempting to attach a childrestraint seat in the middle ofthe rear seat to the ISOFIXanchors. In a crash, the childrestraint seat ISOFIX attach-ments may not be strongenough to secure the childrestraint seat properly in thecentre of the rear seat andmay break, causing seriousinjury or death.

(Continued)


523

F ISO/L1 - X X -

G ISO/L2 - X X -

E ISO/R1 - IUF IUF -

E ISO/R1 - IUF IUF -

D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -

C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -

D ISO/R2 - IUF IUF -

C ISO/R3 - IUF IUF -

B ISO/F2 - IUF IUF -

B1 ISO/F2X - IUF IUF -

A ISO/F3 - IUF IUF -

Rear Outboard

(Passenger side)

Rear Outboard

(Driver side)Front Passenger

FixtureSize ClassMass Group

Carrycot

0 : UP to 10kg

0+ : UP to 13kg

I : 9 to 18kg

Rear Centre

vehicle ISOFIX positions

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems ofuniversal category approved for use in the mass group.

X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys-tem in this mass group and/or this size class.

* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at theforemost position of the passenger seat.

* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixturesA - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward Facing toddler CRS (height

720 mm)

B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward Facing toddler CRS(height 650 mm)

B1- ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back SurfaceShape Forward -Facing toddler CRS (height650 mm)

C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward Facing toddler CRSD - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward Facing toddler CRSE - ISO/R1: Infant -Size Rearward Facing CRSF - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)

Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions - For Europe

3 53


AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OED036080R/OED036035R/OED036036R/OED036075R/OED036037/OED036038/OED036106/OED036040R/1LDA2054/OED036039

3

(1) Driver’s air bag(2) Front passenger’s air bag(3) Front passenger’s air bag ON/OFF

switch(4) Side air bag(5) Curtain air bag(6) SRS Control Module(7) Side impact sensor(8) Front impact sensor

1 2

54

876


543

SRS components and func-tionsThe SRS consists of the followingcomponents:1. SRS “AIR BAG” warning light2. Front passenger’s Air bag Module3. Driver’s Air Bag Module4. Front Impact Sensors5. Side Impact Sensors6. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)7. Retractor Pre-tensioner

Assemblies8. Side Air Bag Modules9. Curtain Air bag Modules10. Front passenger’s air bag OFF

indicator11. Front passenger’s air bag

ON/OFF switch

The SRSCM continually monitors allSRS components whilst the ignitionswitch is ON to determine if a crashimpact is severe enough to requireair bag deployment or pre-tensionerseat belt deployment.

The SRS AIR BAG warning light onthe instrument panel will blink or illu-minate for about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ONposition, after which the AIR BAGwarning light should go out.If any of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunetionof the SRS. Have an authorised Kiadealer inspect the air bag system assoon as possible.• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after illuminating

for approximately 6 seconds.• The light comes on whilst the vehi-

cle is in motion.

3 55


What your air bag systemdoesDriver’s air bag and front passen-ger’s air bag are designed to supple-ment the protection offered by theseat belt in certain frontal collisions.Likewise, side air bag and curtain airbags are designed to supplementthe protection offered by the seat beltin side collisions. seat belts aredesigned to reduce the injury of thedriver or passengers in case of lightimpact or collision. However, to helpreduce impact on driver or passen-gers in a serious collision, seat beltsmust also be correctly worn.

What your air bag systemdoes not doThe air bag system is designed tosupplement the protection offered bythe seat belt system. IT IS NOT ASUBSTITUTE FOR THE SEATBELT.

The importance of using seat beltsThere are four very important rea-sons to use seat belts even with anair bag supplemental restraint sys-tem. They:• help keep you in the proper posi-

tion (away from the air bag) when itinflates.

• reduce the risk of harm in rollover,or rear impact collisions, becausean air bag is not designed to inflatein such situations and even a sidecurtain air bag is designed toinflate only in certain side impactcollisions.

• reduce the risk of harm in frontal orside collisions which are notsevere enough to actuate the airbag supplemental restraint system.

• reduce the risk of being thrownfrom your vehicle.


563

(Continued)• If your vehicle has been sub-

jected to flood conditions (e.g.soaked carpeting/standingwater on the floor of the vehi-cle, etc.) or if your vehicle hasbecome flood damaged in anyway, do not attempt to startthe vehicle or put the key inthe ignition before discon-necting the battery. This maycause air bag deployment,which could result in seriouspersonal injury or death. Ifflooded conditions are sub-jected to your vehicle, beforestarting the vehicle, have thevehicle towed to an autho-rised Kia dealer for inspectionand necessary repairs.

(Continued)• Driver’s and front passenger’s

air bag are designed to inflateonly in certain frontal colli-sions, and side and curtain airbags are designed to inflate incertain side impacts. They willgenerally not provide protec-tion in rear impacts, rollovers,less severe frontal collisions.They will not provide protec-tion from later impacts in amulti-impact collision.

(Continued)

WARNING - Air bags &seat belts

• Even in vehicles with air bags,you and your passengersmust always wear the seatbelts provided in order to min-imize the risk and severity ofinjury in the event of a colli-sion or rollover.

• Always wear your seat belt. Itcan help keep you away fromthe air bags during heavybraking just before a collision.

• If occupants are not fastenedor correctly seated, they can-not be protected, and thusface serious injury or death.

(Continued)

3 57


Driver’s air bagThe driver’s air bag is stored in thecentre of the steering wheel.

* The actual air bags in the vehiclemay differ from the illustration.

Front passenger’s air bag Front passenger’s air bag is stored inthe instrument panel above the glovebox.Since you cannot anticipate which airbags will deploy or from what direc-tion, never put any objects or orna-ments on the instrument panel.


WARNING• You must always sit as far

back from the steering wheelair bag as possible (chest atleast 250 mm (10 inches) awayfrom the steering wheel),whilst still maintaining a com-fortable seating position forgood vehicle control, in orderto reduce the risk of injury ordeath in a collision.

• Never place objects over theair bag storage compartmentsor between the air bags andyourself. Due to the speed andforce of the air bag inflation,such objects could hit yourbody at high speed and causesevere bodily injury and evendeath.

• Do not put stickers or orna-ments on the steering wheelcover. These may interferewith the deployment of the airbag.

OED036036R

HLZ2121/H

OED036035R

HLZ2120/H


583

Front passenger’s air bagON/OFF switch (if equipped)The front passenger’s air bag can bedeactivated by the front passenger’sair bag ON/OFF switch if a childrestraint is installed on the front pas-senger's seat or if the front passen-ger's seat is unoccupied by a person.To ensure the safety of your child,the front passenger’s air bag must bedeactivated when it should be neces-sary to install a rearward facing childseat on the front passenger seat inexceptional circumstances.

To deactivate or reactivate the frontpassenger’s air bagTo deactivate the front passenger’sair bag, insert the master key into thefront passenger’s air bag ON/OFFswitch and turn it to the "OFF" posi-tion. The front passenger’s air bagOFF indicator will illuminate and stayon until the front passenger’s air bagis reactivated.To reactivate the front passenger’sair bag, insert the master key into thefront passenger’s air bag ON/OFFswitch and turn it to the "ON" posi-tion. The front passenger’s air bagOFF indicator will go out.

✽✽ NOTICE• When the front passenger’s air bag

switch is set to "ON" position, thefront passenger’s air bag is activat-ed and child or infant seat shouldnot be installed on the front pas-senger seat.

• When the front passenger’s air bagswitch is set to "OFF" position, thefront passenger’s air bag is deacti-vated.

OED036075R OED036076R

CAUTION • If the front passenger’s air bag

ON/OFF switch is not workingproperly, the air bag warninglight on the instrument panelwill illuminate.And, the front passenger’s airbag OFF indicator will not illu-minate, the SRS ControlModule reactivate the frontpassenger’s air bag and thefront passenger’s air bag willinflate in frontal impact crash-es even if the front passenger’sair bag ON/OFF switch is set to"OFF" position.

(Continued)

3 59


(Continued)• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the front pas-senger's air bag ON/OFFswitch, do not install a childrestraint system in the frontpassenger's seat. A childrestraint system must neverbe placed in the front seat.Children who are too large forchild restraint systems shouldalways occupy the rear seatand use the availablelap/shoulder belts. Childrenare afforded the most safety inthe event of an accident whenthey are restrained by a prop-er restraint system in the rearseat.

• As soon as the child seat is nolonger needed on the frontpassenger's seat, reactivatethe front passenger's air bag.

(Continued)If this occurs, have an autho-rised Kia dealer inspect thefront passenger’s air bagON/OFF switch, the pre-ten-sioner seat belt system andthe SRS air bag system assoon as possible.

• If the SRS air bag warninglight does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, or if it illu-minates whilst the vehicle isbeing driven, have an autho-rised Kia dealer inspect thefront passenger’s air bagON/OFF switch, pre-tensionerseat belt and the SRS air bagsystem as soon as possible.

WARNING• The driver is responsible for

the proper position of thefront passenger’s air bagON/OFF switch.

• Deactivate the front passen-ger's air bag only when theignition switch is switched off,or the malfunction may occurin the SRS Control Module.And there may be a dangerthat the driver's and/or frontpassenger’s and/or side andcurtain air bag may fail to trig-ger, or not trigger correctlyduring a collision.

• Never install a rearward facingchild seat on the front passen-ger's seat unless the frontpassenger's air bag has beendeactivated.The infant or childcould be severely injured orkilled by an air bag deploy-ment in case of an accident.

(Continued)


603

(Continued)• If driver brakes the vehicle

heavily in an urgent situa-tions, occupants will bethrown forward. If front pas-sengers are not wearing theseat belts, they will be directlyin front of the storage com-partment when inflationoccurs. In that situation, seri-ous injury or death is possi-ble.

• Never allow front passengerto put their hands or feet onthe instrument panel or puttheir face close to the instru-ment panel. The air bag willimpact the front passengerwhen it inflates.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never allow children/old

and feeble persons/pregnantwomen to sit on the front pas-senger’s seat. Do not put childrestraint system on the frontpassenger’s seat either. Theymay be seriously injured bythe air bag inflation when airbag deploys.

• Do not put objects or stickerson the instrument panel. Donot apply any accessory onthe front windscreen glass ordo not install aftermarket mir-rors or accessories on the fac-tory installed rearview mirror.These may interfere with thedeployment of air bag inflationor could hit your body at highspeed and cause severe bodi-ly injury and even death.

WARNING• The front seat passenger’s air

bag is much larger than thesteering wheel air bag andinflates with considerablymore force. It can seriouslyhurt or kill a passenger who isnot in the proper position andwearing the seat belt properly.The front passengers shouldalways move their seat as farback as practical and sit backin their seat.

• It is essential that the frontpassengers always wear theirseat belts, even when thevehicle is moving in a parkinglot or up a driveway intogarage.

(Continued)

3 61


Side air bagYour vehicle is equipped with a sideair bag in each front seat. The pur-pose of the air bag is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front pas-senger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat beltalone.

The side impact air bags aredesigned to deploy only during cer-tain side-impact collisions, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle,speed and point of impact. The sideair bags are not designed to deployin all side impact situations.


WARNING• The side air bag is supple-

mental to the driver's and thepassenger's seat belt systemsand is not a substitute forthem. Therefore your seatbelts must be worn at all timeswhilst the vehicle is in motion.The air bags deploy only incertain side impact conditionssevere enough to cause sig-nificant injury to the vehicleoccupants.

• For best protection from theside air bag system and toavoid being injured by thedeploying side air bag, bothfront seat occupants shouldsit in an upright position withthe seat belt properly fas-tened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steer-ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00positions. The passenger'sarms and hands should beplaced on their laps.

(Continued)

OED036107

OED036038/OED036037


623

Curtain air bagCurtain air bags are located alongboth sides of the roof rails above thefront and rear doors.They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupantsand the rear outboard seat occupantsin certain side impact collisions.


(Continued)• Do not use any accessory

seat covers.• Use of seat covers could

reduce or prevent the effec-tiveness of the system.

• Do not install any accessorieson the side or near the side airbag.

• Do not place any objects overthe air bag or between the airbag and yourself.

• Do not place any objects (anumbrella, bag, etc.) betweenthe front door and the frontseat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectilesand cause injury if the supple-mental side air bag inflates.

(Continued)

(Continued)• To prevent unexpected

deployment of the side air bagthat may result in personalinjury, avoid impact to the sideimpact sensor when the igni-tion switch is on.

• If seat or seat cover is dam-aged, have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorised KIA dealer.

OED036098

OED036106

3 63


The curtain air bags are designed todeploy only during certain sideimpact collisions, depending on thecrash severity, angle, speed andimpact. The curtain air bags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impactsituations, collisions from the front orrear of the vehicle or in most rolloversituations.

WARNING• In order for side and curtain

air bags to provide the bestprotection, both front seatoccupants and both outboardrear occupants should sit inan upright position with theseat belts properly fastened.Importantly, children shouldsit in a proper child restraintsystem in the rear seat.

• When children are seated inthe rear outboard seats, theymust be seated in the properchild restraint system. Makesure to put the child restraintsystem as far away from thedoor side as possible, andsecure the child restraint sys-tem in a locked position.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not allow the passengers

to lean their heads or bodiesonto doors, put their arms onthe doors, stretch their armsout of the window, or placeobjects between the doorsand passengers when they areseated on seats equipped withside and/or curtain air bags.

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the side cur-tain air bag system. Thisshould only be done by anauthorised KIA dealer.

Failure to follow the above men-tioned instructions can result ininjury or death to the vehicleoccupants in an accident.


643

Why didn’t my air bag go off ina collision? (Inflation and non-inflation condi-tions of the air bag)There are many types of accidents inwhich the air bag would not beexpected to provide additional pro-tection.These include rear impacts, secondor third collisions in multiple impactaccidents, as well as low speedimpacts. In other words, just becauseyour vehicle is damaged and even ifit is totally unusable, don’t be sur-prised that the air bags did notinflate.

Air bag collision sensors(1) SRS control module(2) Front impact sensor(3) Side impact sensor

OED036082R/OED036040R/OED036039/1LDA2054

3 65


Air bag inflation conditionFront air bag Front air bags (driver’s and front pas-senger’s air bags) are designed toinflate when the impact is deliveredto front collision sensors dependingon the intensity, speed or angles ofimpact of the front collision - general-ly from an area a little to the left to alittle to the right of straight ahead.

WARNING• Do not hit or allow any objects

to impact the locations whereair bag or sensors areinstalled.This may cause unexpectedair bag deployment, whichcould result in serious per-sonal injury or death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is alteredin any way, the air bags maydeploy when they should notor they may not deploy whenthey should, causing severeinjury or death.Therefore, do not try to per-form maintenance on oraround the air bag sensors.Have the vehicle checked andrepaired by the authorised Kiadealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Problems may arise if the sen-

sor installation angles arechanged due to the deforma-tion of front bumper, body or Bpillar where side collision sen-sors are installed. Have thevehicle checked and repairedby the authorised Kia dealer.

• Your vehicle has beendesigned to absorb impactand deploy the air bag(s) incertain collisions. Installingaftermarket bumper guards orreplacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adverselyaffect your vehicles collisionand air bag deployment per-formance.

OED036096


663

Side air bags (if equipped)Side air bags (side and/or curtain airbags) are designed to inflate whenthe impact is delivered to side colli-sion sensors depending on thestrength, speed or angles of impactof side impact collision or rollover bythe side impact.

Although the front air bags (driver’sand front passenger’s air bags) aredesigned to inflate only in frontal col-lision, it may inflate in any collision iffront impact sensors are deliveredwith certain impact.Side air bags (side and/or curtain airbags) are designed to inflate only inside impact collision, it may inflate inany collision if side impact sensorsare delivered with certain impact.

In other words, they may inflate inaccidents such as slant collision orimpact, collision or impact where thefront portion of the vehicle goesunder a vehicle with a higher groundclearance (bus or truck), collisionwith a utility pole or rollover.Therefore, drive safely at all times.If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimprovedroads or sidewalks, air bags maydeploy. Drive carefully on unim-proved roads or on surfaces notdesigned for vehicle traffic.To protect occupants, front air bagsand pre-tensioner seat belts maydeploy in certain side impact colli-sions.

OED036097

OED036098

3 67


Air bag non-inflation conditions• In collisions, the vehicle seat belts

are sufficient to protect the vehicleoccupants and the air bags maynot deploy. In some cases, deploy-ing air bags in low-speed collisionscan cause a secondary impact tothe occupants (light abrasions,cuts, burns, etc.), or loss of vehiclecontrol.

• Air bags may not inflate in rear col-lisions, because occupants aremoved backward by the force ofthe impact. In this case, the airbags do not provide proper protec-tion.

• Front air bags may not inflate inside impact collision, becauseoccupants move to the direction ofthe collision, and thus front air bagdeployment does not provide prop-er protection.However, side or curtain air bagsmay inflate depending on the inten-sity, vehicle speed and angles ofimpact.

OED036100 OED036101OED036099


683

• In a slant impact or collision, theforce delivered will be relativelyweaker than that of frontal colli-sion. So, the air bags may notinflate.

• At the moment of an accident, driv-ers brake heavily with reflex. Insuch heavy braking, the front por-tion of the vehicle is lowered by theforce of the braking and the vehiclecan go under a vehicle with a high-er ground clearance. Air bags maynot inflate in this situation becauseimpacts may not be delivered ormay be delivered with less intensi-ty.

• Air bags may not inflate in rolloveraccidents because air bag deploy-ment would not provide proper pro-tection to the occupants.However, side air bags may inflatewhen the vehicle is rolled over by aside impact collision.

OED036102 OED036103 OED036104

3 69


• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-cle collides with objects such asutility poles or trees, where thepoint of impact is concentrated toone area and the full force of theimpact is not delivered to the sen-sors.

How does the air bag systemoperate • Air bag only operates when the

ignition switch is turned to ON orSTART position.

• Air bags inflate instantly in theevent of serious frontal or side col-lision in order to help protect theoccupants from serious physicalinjury.

• There is no single speed at whichthe air bags will inflate.Generally, air bags are designed toinflate by the severity of a collisionand its direction. These two factorsdetermine whether the sensorssend out an electronic deploy-ment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of factors including vehiclespeed, angles of impact and thedensity and stiffness of the vehi-cles or objects which your vehiclehits in the collision. Though, factorsare not limited to those mentionedabove.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.It is virtually impossible for you tosee the air bags inflate during anaccident. It is much more likely thatyou will simply see the deflated airbags hanging out of their storagecompartments after the collision.

OED036105


703

• In order to help provide protectionin a severe collision, the air bagsmust inflate rapidly. The speed ofair bag inflation reduces the likeli-bonnet of serious or life-threateninginjuries and is thus a mandatorypart of the air bag design.However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which normally caninclude facial abrasions, bruisesand broken bones, because thatspeed also causes the air bags toexpand with a great deal force.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with thesteering wheel air bag can causefatal injuries, especially if theoccupant is positioned exces-sively close to the steeringwheel.

Noise and smokeWhen the air bags inflate, they makea loud noise and they leave smokeand powder in the air inside of thevehicle. This is normal and is a resultof the ignition of the air bag inflator.After the air bag inflates, you mayfeel substantial discomfort in breath-ing due to the contact of your chestto both the seat belt and the air bag,as well as from breathing the smokeand powder. We strongly urge youto open your doors and/or win-dows as soon as possible afterimpact in order to reduce discom-fort and prevent prolonged expo-sure to the smoke and powder.Though smoke and powder are non-toxic, it may cause irritation to theskin (eyes, nose and throat etc). Ifthis is the case, wash and rinse withthe cold water immediately and con-sult the doctor if the symptom per-sists.

WARNING• Driver should sit as far back

(at least 250 mm (10 inches)away) from the steering wheelair bag as possible to reducethe risk of injury or death in acollision. The front passengershould always move their seatas far back as possible and sitback in their seat.

• Air bag inflates instantly in anevent of collision, passengersmay be injured by the air bagexpansion force if they are notin proper position.

• Air bag inflation may causeinjuries which normallyinclude facial or bodily abra-sions, injuries by the brokenglasses or burns by the explo-sives.

3 71


Installing a child restraint on afront passenger seat is forbid-den.Never place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger seat.If the air bag deploys, it would impactthe rear-facing child restraint, caus-ing serious or fatal injury.In addition, do not place front-facingchild restraint in the front passengerseat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it would cause seriousor fatal injuries to the improperlypositioned or improperly restrainedchild.

WARNING• Never put child restraint in the

front passenger seat. If thefront passenger air baginflates, it would cause seri-ous or fatal injuries.

• When children are seated inthe rear outboard seats inwhich curtain air bags areequipped, be sure to put thechild restraint system as faraway from the door side aspossible, and secure the childrestraint system to be lockedin position.Inflation of side or curtain airbag could cause seriousinjury or death due to theexpansion impact.

WARNINGWhen the air bags deploy, theair bag related parts in steeringwheel and/or instrument paneland/or in both sides of the roofrails above the front and reardoors are very hot. To preventinjury, do not touch the air bagstorage areas internal compo-nents immediately after an airbag has inflated. 1JBH3051


723

Air bag warning lightThe purpose of air bag warning lightin your instrument panel is to alertyou of a potential problem with yourair bag - Supplemental RestraintSystem (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turnedON, the indicator light should blink orilluminate for approximately 6 sec-onds, then go off.Have the system checked if:• The light does not turn on briefly

when you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after the engine

starts.• The light comes on whilst the vehi-

cle is in motion.

SRS CareThe SRS is virtually maintenance-free and so there are no parts youcan safely service by yourself. If theSRS "AIR BAG" warning light doesnot illuminate, or continuouslyremains on, have your vehicle imme-diately inspected by an authorisedKIA dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, suchas removing, installing, repairing, orany work on the steering wheel mustbe performed by an authorised KIAdealer. Improper handling of the SRSsystem may result in serious person-al injury.

AIRBAG

3 73


WARNING • Modification to SRS compo-

nents or wiring, including theaddition of any kind of badgesto the pad covers or modifica-tions to the body structure,can adversely affect SRS per-formance and lead to possibleinjury.

• For cleaning the air bag padcovers, use only a soft, drycloth or one which has beenmoistened with plain water.Solvents or cleaners couldadversely affect the air bagcovers and proper deploy-ment of the system.

(Continued)

(Continued)• No objects should be placed

over or near the air bag mod-ules on the steering wheel,instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel abovethe glove box, because anysuch object could cause harmif the vehicle is in a crashsevere enough to cause theair bags to inflate.

• If the air bags inflate, theymust be replaced by an autho-rised KIA dealer.

• Do not tamper with or discon-nect SRS wiring, or other com-ponents of the SRS system.Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental inflation ofthe air bags or by renderingthe SRS inoperative.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If components of the air bag

system must be discarded, orif the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety pre-cautions must be observed.An authorised KIA dealerknows these precautions andcan give you the necessaryinformation. Failure to followthese precautions and proce-dures could increase the riskof personal injury.

• If your car was flooded andhas soaked carpeting or wateron flooring, you shouldn't tryto start the engine; have thecar towed to an authorisedKIA dealer.


743

Additional safety precautions• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat. All occupantsshould sit upright, fully back in theirseats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor.

• Passengers should not moveout of or change seats whilst thevehicle is moving. A passengerwho is not wearing a seat belt dur-ing a crash or emergency stop canbe thrown against the inside of thevehicle, against other occupants,or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed torestrain one occupant. If morethan one person uses the sameseat belt, they could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

• Do not use any accessories onseat belts. Devices claiming toimprove occupant comfort or repo-sition the seat belt can reduce theprotection provided by the seat beltand increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

• Passengers should not placehard or sharp objects betweenthemselves and the air bags.Carrying hard or sharp objects onyour lap or in your mouth can resultin injuries if an air bag inflates.

• Keep occupants away from theair bag covers. All occupantsshould sit upright, fully back in theirseats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor. If occupantsare too close to the air bag covers,they could be injured if the air bagsinflate.

• Do not attach or place objectson or near the air bag covers.Any object attached to or placedon the front or side air bag coverscould interfere with the properoperation of the air bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.Modification of the front seatscould interfere with the operation ofthe supplemental restraint systemsensing components or side airbags.

• Do not place items under thefront seats. Placing items underthe front seats could interfere withthe operation of the supplementalrestraint system sensing compo-nents and wiring harnesses.

• Never hold an infant or child onyour lap. The infant or child couldbe seriously injured or killed in theevent of a crash. All infants andchildren should be properlyrestrained in appropriate childsafety seats or seat belts in therear seat.

3 75


Adding equipment to or modi-fying your air bag-equippedvehicleIf you modify your vehicle by chang-ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-tem, front end or side sheet metal orride height, this may affect the oper-ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-tem.

WARNING• Sitting improperly or out of

position can cause occupantsto be shifted too close to adeploying air bag, strike theinterior structure or be thrownfrom the vehicle resulting inserious injury or death.

• Always sit upright with theseatback in an upright posi-tion, centred on the seat cush-ion with your seat belt on, legscomfortably extended andyour feet on the floor.


763

Air bag warning labelAir bag warning label is attached to alert driver and passengers of potential risk of air bag system.

OED036081R/OED036041/OED036042R

3 77


Opening the bonnet:1. Pull the release lever on the lower

left side of the instrument panel tounlatch the bonnet. The bonnetshould pop open slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raisethe bonnet slightly, push the sec-ondary latch (1) inside of the bon-net centre and lift (2) the bonnet.

3. Lift the bonnet and hold it openwith the support rod by insertingthe free end of the rod into the slot(1).

BONNET

OED036043R OED036044 OED036071

CAUTIONGrasp the support rod in thearea wrapped in rubber.The rub-ber will help prevent you frombeing burned by hot metal whenthe engine is hot.


783

Closing the bonnet1. Before closing the bonnet, check

the following:• All filler caps in engine compart-

ment must be correctly installed.• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must beremoved from the engine com-partment.

2. Secure the support rod in its clip.3. Lower the bonnet to about 30 cm

(12 inches) height and then let itdrop to properly lock in place.Make sure the bonnet is properlylocked before driving.

WARNING • Before closing the bonnet,

make sure that all engineparts and tools have beenremoved from the engine areaand that no one’s hands arenear the bonnet opening.

• Do not leave gloves, rags orany other combustible materi-al in the engine compartment.Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.

3 79


1. Stop the engine.2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the

release lever.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel

tank cap counter-clockwise.5. Refuel as needed.6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise

until it “clicks”. This indicates thatthe cap is securely tightened.

7. Close the fuel filler lid and push itlightly and make sure that it issecurely closed.

FUEL FILLER LID

OED036045R OED036046

WARNING - RefuelingIf pressurized fuel sprays out, itcan cause serious injuries.Always remove the fuel capcarefully and slowly. If the cap isventing fuel or if you hear ahissing sound, wait until thecondition stops before com-pletely removing the cap.

WARNINGTo avoid injury from sharpobjects, it is recommended thatprotective gloves be worn whenopening the fuel filler door man-ually.


803

WARNING Automotive fuels are flamma-ble/explosive materials. Whenrefueling, please note the fol-lowing guidelines carefully.Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe per-sonal injury, severe burns ordeath by fire or explosion.• Before refueling always note

the location of the EmergencyPetrol Shut-Off, if available, atthe gas station facility.

• Before touching the fuel noz-zle or fuel filler cap, youshould eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricitydischarge by touching anoth-er metal part of the front of thevehicle, a safe distance awayfrom the fuel filler neck, noz-zle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuel-ing. Do not touch, rub or slideagainst any item or fabric(polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)capable of producing staticelectricity. Static electricitydischarge can ignite fuelvapours resulting in explo-sion. If you must re-enter thevehicle, you should onceagain eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricitydischarge by touching a metalpart of the vehicle, away fromthe fuel filler neck, nozzle orother petrol source.

• When using a portable fuelcontainer be sure to place thecontainer on the ground priorto refueling. Static electricitydischarge from the containercan ignite fuel vapours caus-ing a fire. Once refueling hasbegun, contact with the vehi-cle should be maintained untilthe filling is complete.

(Continued)

(Continued)Use only portable fuel con-tainers designed to carry andstore petrol.

• Do not use cellular phonesaround a gas station or whilstrefueling any vehicle. Electriccurrent and/or electronicinterference from cellularphones can potentially ignitefuel vapours causing a fire. Ifyou must use your cellularphone use it in a place awayfrom the gas station.

• When refueling always shutthe engine off. Sparks pro-duced by electrical compo-nents related to the enginecan ignite fuel vapours caus-ing a fire. Always insure thatthe engine is OFF before andduring refueling. Once refuel-ing is complete, check tomake sure the fuel filler capand door are securely closed,before starting the engine.

(Continued)

3 81


✽✽ NOTICEIf the fuel filler lid will not open incold weather because the areaaround it is frozen, push or lightlytap the lid.

(Continued)• Do not light any fire around a

gas station. DO NOT usematches or a lighter and DONOT SMOKE or leave a lit cig-arette in your vehicle whilst ata gas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel ishighly flammable and can,when ignited, result in explo-sion by flames.

• If a fire breaks out during refu-eling, leave the vicinity of thevehicle, and immediately con-tact the manager of the gasstation or contact the policeand local fire department.Follow any safety instructionsthey provide.

CAUTION• Make sure to refuel with petrol

only for the petrol engine vehi-cles and diesel fuel only forthe diesel engine vehicles.

• Check to make sure the fuelfiller cap is securely closedafter refueling.

• If the fuel filler cap requiresreplacement, use only a gen-uine Kia cap or the equivalentspecified for your vehicle. Anincorrect fuel filler cap canresult in a serious malfunctionof the fuel system or emissioncontrol system. Correctreplacement caps are avail-able at authorised Kia dealers.

• Do not spill fuel on the exteri-or surfaces of the vehicle. Anytype of fuel spilled on paintedsurfaces may damage thepaint.


823

Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust mirror anglesbefore driving.Your vehicle is equipped with bothleft-hand and right-hand outsiderearview mirrors. The mirrors can beadjusted remotely with the controllevers or remote switch, dependingon the type of mirror control installed.The mirror heads can be folded backto prevent damage during an auto-matic car wash or when passing in anarrow street. Manual remote control

(if equipped)To adjust an outside mirror, move thecontrol lever which is located at theforward inside area of the windowframe.

MIRRORS

CAUTIONDo not scrape ice off the mirrorface; this may damage the sur-face of the glass. If ice shouldrestrict movement of the mirror,do not force the mirror foradjustment. To remove ice, usea deicer spray, or a sponge orsoft cloth with very warm water.

WARNING • The left outside rearview mir-

ror is convex. In some coun-tries, the right outside rearviewmirror is also convex. Objectsseen in the mirror are closerthan they appear.

• Use your interior rearview mir-ror or direct observation todetermine the actual distanceof following vehicles whenchanging lanes.

1LDA2081A/H

3 83


Electric remote control (if equipped)The electric remote control mirrorswitch allows you to adjust the posi-tion of the left and right outsiderearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-tion of either mirror, move the lever(1) to R or L to select the right sidemirror or the left side mirror, thenpress a corresponding point (▲) onthe mirror adjustment control to posi-tion the selected mirror up, down, leftor right.After adjustment, put the lever intoneutral position to prevent the inad-vertent adjustment.

Folding the outside rearview mirrorManual typeTo fold outside rearview mirror, graspthe housing of mirror and then fold ittoward the rear of the vehicle.

OED036047R

CAUTION• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximumadjusting angles, but themotor continues to operatewhilst the switch isdepressed. Do not depressthe switch longer than neces-sary, the motor may be dam-aged.

• Do not attempt to adjust theoutside rearview mirror byhands. Doing so may damagethe parts.

1LDA2083A/H


843

Electric type (if equipped)To fold the outside rearview mirror,depress the button.To unfold it, depress the buttonagain.

✽✽ NOTICEIn case of the electric type of outsiderearview mirror, don’t fold it byhand. It could cause the failure ofthe motor.

Outside rearview mirror heater (if equipped) The outside rearview mirror heater isactuated in connection with the rearwindow defroster. To heat the outsiderearview mirror glass, push the but-ton ( ) for the rear windowdefroster.The outside rearview mirror glass willbe heated for defrosting or defoggingand will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather condi-tions. Push the button again to turnthe heater off. The outside rearviewmirror heater automatically turns offafter 20 minutes.

Day/night rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror to centreon the view through the rear window.Make this adjustment before youstart driving.

CAUTIONDo not place objects in the rearseat or cargo area which wouldinterfere with your vision outthe rear window.

OED036083R

3 85


Manual type Make this adjustment before youstart driving and whilst the day/nightlever is in the day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce glare from the headlights ofvehicles behind you during nightdriving.Remember that you lose somerearview clarity in the night position.

Electric type (if equipped)The sensor mounted in the mirrorsenses the light level around thevehicle, and through a chemical reac-tion, automatically controls the head-light glare from vehicles behind you.Whenever the shift lever is shiftedinto reverse (R), the mirror will auto-matically go to the brightest setting inorder to improve the drivers viewbehind the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is ON, theautomatic- dimming function will turnon automatically.Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turnthe automatic- dimming function off.The mirror indicator light will turn off.Press the ON/OFF button (1) onceagain to turn the automatic- dimmingfunction on, the mirror indicator lightwill illuminate.

OED036048R

Day

Night

1KMA30841

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the mirror, use apaper towel or similar materialdampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the mirror as thatmay cause the liquid cleaner toenter the mirror housing.


863

Front (if equipped)(1) The lights are turned ON or OFF

by pressing the correspondingswitch.

(2) DOOR:The light turns on when a door isopened or when a door isunlocked by the transmitter (ifequipped). Interior light goes outslowly after 30 seconds if the dooris closed. However if the ignitionswitch is ON or all vehicle doorsare locked by the transmitter whenthe door is closed, interior light willturn off even within 30 seconds.

Centre (if equipped)(1) The lights are turned ON or OFF

by pressing the correspondingswitch.

(2) DOOR:The light turns on when a door isopened or when a door isunlocked by the transmitter (ifequipped). Interior light goes outslowly after 30 seconds if the dooris closed. However if the ignitionswitch is ON or all vehicle doorsare locked by the transmitter whenthe door is closed, interior light willturn off even within 30 seconds.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

OED036051OED036050

3 87


STORAGE COMPARTMENT ✽✽ NOTICE• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage com-partment.

• Since stored items may movewhilst driving, be sure to positionthem in the storage compartmentso that they do not make noise orcause a potential safety hazardwhen the vehicle is moving.

• Always keep the storage compart-ment covers closed whilst driving.Do not attempt to place manyitems in the storage compartmentthat the storage compartmentcover can not close securely.

Centre console storage(if equipped)To open either of the console storagecompartments, pull up on the lockingtab 1 or 2.These compartments can be used tostore small items required by thedriver or front passenger.

WARNINGDo not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or otherflammable/explosive materialsin the vehicle. These items maycatch fire and/or explode if thevehicle is exposed to hot tem-peratures for extended periods.

OED036053R


883

Multi Box (if equipped)To open the cover, push the button.It can be used for storing small items.

Glove boxTo open the glove box, pull the han-dle (1) and the glove box will auto-matically open (2). Close the glovebox after use.If the cool box is equipped, you cankeep beverage cans or other itemswarm or cool using the open/closelever of the vent installed in the glovebox.For details, see chapter 4.

Sunglass holder (if equipped)A sunglass storage compartment isprovided on the overhead console.To open the sunglass holder, pressthe cover and the holder will slowlyopen. Place your sunglasses in thecompartment door with the lensesfacing out. Push to close.

✽✽ NOTICEMake sure the sunglass holder isclosed whilst driving.

OED036055R

CAUTION To reduce the risk of injury incase of an accident or suddenstop, always keep the glove boxdoor closed whilst driving.

OED036054R OED036056

3 89


Cigarette lighter (if equipped)To operate the cigarette lighter, pressit in and release it. When it is heated,it automatically pops out ready foruse.If the engine is not running, the igni-tion switch must be in the ACC posi-tion for the lighter to operate.

✽✽ NOTICE• Do not hold the lighter in after it is

already heated because it willoverheat.

• Only a genuine Kia lighter shouldbe used in the cigarette lightersocket. The use of plug-in acces-sories (shavers, hand-held vacu-ums, and coffee pots, for example)may damage the socket or causeelectrical failure.

• If the lighter does not pop outwithin 30 seconds, remove it toprevent overheating.

Ashtrays (if equipped)To use the ashtray, press the frontface and release it to allow the ciga-rette lighter and ashtray to slowlyextend from centre panel.To remove the ashtray, grasp theashtray bucket and carefully pull itout.

INTERIOR FEATURES

OED036057R OED036058R

WARNING - Ashtray use• Do not use the vehicle’s ash-

trays as waste receptacles.• Putting lit cigarettes or match-

es in an ashtray with othercombustible materials maycause a fire.


903

Cup holder

FrontCups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

Rear (if equipped)To use the cup holders in rear seat,push the button. Push the cover toclose after use.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not place heavy cups or cans incup holders. Cup holders could bedamaged.

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups

of hot liquid in the cup holderwhilst the vehicle is in motion.If the hot liquid spills, youcould be burned. Such a burnto the driver could cause aloss of control of the vehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of suddenstop or collision, do not placeuncovered or insecure bot-tles, glasses, cans, etc., in thecup holder whilst the vehicleis in motion.

OED036059R OED036060

3 91


SunvisorUse the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.To use a sunvisor for a side window,pull it downward, unsnap it from thebracket (1) and swing it to the side.To use the vanity mirror, pull downthe visor and open the mirror cover(2).The vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)will turn off after closing the mirrorcover or returning the sunvisor to itsoriginal position.

✽✽ NOTICE• Close the vanity mirror cover

securely and return the sunvisorto its original position after use.

• If the vanity mirror lamp (ifequipped) stays on, it could resultin battery discharge and possiblesunvisor damage.

Power outletThe power outlets are designed toprovide power for mobile telephonesor other devices designed to operatewith vehicle electrical systems. Thedevices should draw less than 10amps with the engine running.

OED036061ROED036091R


923

✽✽ NOTICE• Use the power outlet when the

engine is running, and remove aplug from the power outlet afterusing the electric appliance. Usingwhen the engine stops or remain-ing the electric appliance withplugged in for many hours maycause the battery to be discharged.

• Only use the electric applianceswhich are less than 12V and 10Ain electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner orheater to the lowest operation levelwhen you have to use the powersocket whilst using air-conditioneror heater.

• Close the cover when not in use.• Some electronic devices can cause

electronic interference whenplugged into a vehicle’s power out-let. These devices may causeexcessive audio static and mal-functions in other electronic sys-tems or devices used in your vehi-cle.

Digital clock (if equipped)Whenever the battery terminals,ROOM fuse, or Power Connect aredisconnected, you must reset thetime.For details, see trip computer onchapter 4.

Aux and USB port(if equipped)If your vehicle has an aux and/orUSB(universal serial bus) port, youcan use an aux port to connect audiodevices and an USB port to plug inan USB.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen using a portable audio deviceconnected to the power outlet, noisemay occur during playback. If thishappens, use the power source of theportable audio device.

OED036063 OED036062R

3 93


If your vehicle is equipped with asunroof, you can slide or tilt yoursunroof with the sunroof control but-tons located on the overhead con-sole.(1) Slide button(2) Tilt button(3) Close button

The sunroof can only be opened,closed, or tilted when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

✽✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, the sun-

roof may not work properly due tofreezing conditions.

• After washing the car or afterthere is rain, be sure to wipe offany water that is on the sunroofbefore operating it.

✽✽ NOTICEThe sunroof cannot slide when it isin the tilt position nor can it be tiltedwhilst in an open or slide position.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OED036064

CAUTIONDo not continue to press thesunroof control button(s) afterthe sunroof is in the fully open,closed, or tilt position(s).Damage to the motor or systemcomponents could occur.

WARNINGNever adjust the sunshadewhilst driving. This could resultin loss of control and an acci-dent that may cause death, seri-ous injury, or property damage.


943

Sliding the sunroof To open the sunroof (autoslide fea-ture), press the slide button (1) onthe overhead console for more than0.5 second.The sunroof will slide to the recom-mended open position (about 50mmbefore the maximum slide open posi-tion).To stop the sunroof sliding at anypoint, press any sunroof control but-ton.

To open the sunroof to the maximumslide open position, press the slidebutton (1) once again and hold it untilthe sunroof slide all the way open.

✽✽ NOTICETo reduce wind noise whilst driving,we recommend you to drive at therecommended postion (about 50mmbefore the maximum slide openpositon).

To close the sunroof (autoslide fea-ture), press the close button (3) onthe overhead console for more than0.5 second.The sunroof will slide all the wayclose. To stop the sunroof sliding atany point, press any sunroof controlbutton.

Automatic reversalIf an object or part of the body isdetected whilst the sunroof is closingautomatically, it will reverse direction,and then stop.Auto reverse function does not workif a tiny obstacle is between the slid-ing glass and the sunroof sash. Youshould always check that all passen-gers and objects are away from thesunroof before closing it.

OED036064 OED036092

3 95


Tilting the sunroof To open the sunroof (autotilt feature),press the tilt button (2) on the over-head console for more than 0.5 sec-onds.The sunroof will tilt all the way open.To stop the sunroof tilting at anypoint, press any sunroof control but-ton.To close the sunroof, press the closebutton (3) on the overhead consoleand hold it until the sunroof is closed.

Sunshade The sunshade will be opened withthe glass panel automatically whenthe glass panel is slid. Close it man-ually if you want it closed.

OED036064

WARNING• Be careful that someone’s

head, hands and body are nottrapped by a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend face, neck,arms or body outside throughthe sunroof opening whilstdriving.

• Make sure hand and face aresafely out of the way beforeclosing a sunroof.OED036093


963

In case of an emergencyIf the sunroof does not open electri-cally:1. Open the sunglass holder.2. Remove the two (2) screws, and

then remove the overhead con-sole.

3. Insert the emergency handle (pro-vided with the vehicle) and turnthe handle clockwise to open orcounterclockwise to close.

CAUTION• Periodically remove any dirt

that may accumulate on theguide rail.

• If you try to open the sunroofwhen the temperature isbelow freezing or when thesunroof is covered with snowor ice, the glass or the motorcould be damaged.

• The sunroof is made to slidetogether with sunshade. Donot leave the sunshade closedwhilst the sunroof is open.

OED036067 OED036068

3 97


Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is dis-connected or discharged, or you usethe emergency handle to operate thesunroof, you must reset your sunroofsystem as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ONposition.

2. Set the sunroof to the maximumTILT-UP position using the corre-sponding sunroof switch.

3. Release the tilt button.4. Press and hold the tilt button (for

more than 10 seconds) until thesunroof has returned to the origi-nal position of tilt after it is raised alittle higher than the maximum tiltposition. Then, release the button.

5. Press and hold the tilt button (formore than 5 seconds) until thesunroof is operated as follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN →SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the button.

When this is complete, the sunroofsystem is reset.


983

To keep items from shifting in theboot, you can use the four ringslocated in the boot to attach thecargo net.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not put fragile, bulky or anexcessive quantity of items into lug-gage net. They could be damaged.

LUGGAGE NET (IF EQUIPPED)

MMSA3066

WARNINGTo avoid eye injury, DO NOToverstretch the netting.ALWAYS keep face and bodyout of recoil path of the net, incase of strap.DO NOT use the luggage netwhen strap has visible signs ofwear or damage.

3 99


To install or remove a roof carrier,you can use the mounting bracketand cover on the roof.When you install a roof carrier, usethe following procedure.1. Insert a slim tool(coin or flat blade

driver) into the slot and slide thecover toward the arrow on thecover.

2. Rotate the cover half way andinsert the cover on the roof hole asthe illustration.

✽✽ NOTICETo prevent loosing the roof carriercover, install the cover on the roofbefore you install the roof carrier.

3. After using the roof carrier, installthe cover back on the roof in thereverse order.

MOUNTING BRACKET FOR ROOF CARRIER

OED046090 OED046091

WARNING Use a coin or flat blade driverwhen you remove the roof carriercover.If you use your fingernail, it maydamage your fingernail.


1003

Roof type antennaIf your vehicle has an audio system,an amplifying antenna is installed inyour vehicle.This antenna can be removed fromthe vehicle when needed such aswashing the vehicle.To remove the antenna, turn it coun-terclockwise.To install the antenna, turn it clock-wise.

✽✽ NOTICE• Be sure to remove the antenna

before washing the car in an auto-matic car wash or it may be dam-aged.

• When reinstalling your antenna,it is important that it is fully tight-ened to ensure proper reception.

ANTENNA

OED036069

3 101


General informationNotes on operating instructionsThe following reading aids are usedto simplify these operating instruc-tions:

asks you to perform an actionshows the unit’s reaction

✐ provides extra infoidentifies a list

AUDIO SYSTEM

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situa-tion in which harm, serious bod-ily injury or death could result ifthe warning is ignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situationin which damage to your vehiclecould result if the caution isignored.

CLASS 1LASER PRODUCT

Class 1 laser product

CAUTIONAny inappropriate use of thedevice may expose the user toinvisible laser rays whichexceed the limits for Class 1laser products.

WARNING Don’t use a cellular phone whenyou are driving. You must stopat a safe place to use a celluarphone.

WARNING When driving your vehicle, besure to keep the volume of theunit set low enough to allow youto hear sounds coming from theoutside.

CAUTION• Do not place beverages close

to the audio system.The audiosystem mechanism may bedamaged if you spill them.

• Do not strike or allow anythingto impact the audio system,damage to the system mecha-nisms could occur.


1023

Safety instructions

Notes on USB stick (thumb drive)

WARNING Make all inputs via the remotecontrol only when the vehicle isstationary, or have the passen-ger make them. Otherwise, youmay endanger the occupantsand other road users.

WARNING Avoid inserting any foreignobjects into the slot of this play-er. Failure to observe this maycause malfunction due to theprecise mechanism of this unit.

WARNING Keep the volume level lowenough to be aware of road andtraffic conditions.

WARNING Do not open covers and do notrepair yourself. Refer servicingto qualified personnel.

WARNING • We strongly recommend only

using USB sticks (thumbdrives) of well-known manu-facturers.

• On no account must otherUSB devices such as harddiscs or other digital equip-ment or multi plug USB hubbe connected to the USB hub.Connecting other devices cancause malfunction or evendestroy the audio equipment.

• Avoid using the USB memorywhen it might hinder yoursafety driving.

(Continued)

(Continued)• It is possible that noise is

heard during playback whenusing the AUX-IN togetherwith the power outlet due tosystem-related not a malfunc-tion. If this happens, use thepower source of the AUXdevice.

• In rare cases it is possible thatan USB stick (thumb drive) isnot recognized by the unit ormay cause a malfunction.Please only use USB sticksthat comply with the USBthumb drive specifications.

3 103


RDS (Radio Data System)Many VHF stations transmit RDSinformation.The radio evaluates the RDStelegram and offers the followingadvantages:

PS (Program Service name):Display of station name.Radio text: Display of additionalinfomation concerning the radiostation.PTY (Program TYpe): Stationselection by program type.AF (Alternative Frequency):Automatic retuning to best alter-native frequency.TA (Traffic Announcement): Trafficannouncements.EON (Enhanced Other Networks):Automatic fade-in of trafficannouncements onother stations.

Notes on CD formatsThe following CD formats are sup-ported by the CD player:

CD Audio (CD-DA in accordancewith the Red Book Standard)CD-R/RW (in accordance withOrange Book, part 2/3)Multisession CD (in accordancewith multisession CD specification1.0) Handling CDs

Avoid leaving fingerprints on the CDwhen removing it.Always store map and audio CDs intheir protective covers.Always ensure that CDs are cleanand dry before inserting.Protect CDs from heat and directsunlight.

Cleaning the unitDo not clean using cleaning fluid,alcohol or other solvents. Use only adamp cloth.


1043

2 3

1

4 5 6 7

8

910111213

1 . . . . . . . . . Press: Switching on/ off . . . . . . . . . . Turn: Volume control

2 . . . . . . . . . . CD eject button

3 / . . . . FM: Previous or next stationCD: Previous or next trackCDC: Previous or next track

4 SCAN . . . . . . . FM: Frequency scans CD/CDC: Scan first 10 secs of each track of the CDs.

5 SETUP . . . . . . Opens the setup menu containing setting at each feature.

6 / . . . . . . . . . MP3 only: change the current playback folder.7 LOAD* . . . . . . . CDC: Load CDs into the unit.

8 . . . FM/CD/CDC: Rotary knob to manually seek up/down.SETUP: To adjust settings.

9 SOUND . . . . . . Opens the menu for the sound settings.10 CD (AUX) Short press: Change the current source to

CD mode or USB (if connected).Long press: Auxiliary (if connected)

11 1 to 6 . . . . . . . . FM/CD/CDC: Press to tune to desired storedstation or to select desired disc in CDC.

RPT . . . . . . . . . CD/CDC: To activate repeat trackRND . . . . . . . . CD/CDC: To activate random track

12 FM/AM . . . . . . . . Change current source to FM/AM mode.13 TA (AST) . . . . . Short press: to activate TA.

Long press: to activate Autostore (Tuner)

* Depend on version

Control elements

3 105


Inserting and removing CDsInserting a CD

Insert the CD into the drive (print-ed side up).

✐ For audio/ MP3 CDs, playbackstarts automatically.

Removing a CDPress the button and carefullyremove the CD.

Switching on/ offPress the button to switch theunit on or off.

Switching on and off with the ignitionkeyIf the unit is switched on, it can beswitched off and on automatically byremoving or inserting and turning theignition key.

Automatic switch offIf the unit was turned on using the

button with the ignition off, itautomatically switches itself off aftera set time.

Volume

Turn the button to set the vol-ume.

Menu operationThe central element for operating themenus is the knob.

Turn the knob to selecta menu option.

WARNING When setting the volume,please make sure that trafficnoises (horns, sirens, emer-gency vehicles, etc.) are stillaudible.


1063

Sound settingsPress the SOUND button.Press SOUND button repeatedlyto access the following sub-menus.

Turn the knob to selectdesired settings.To exit, press SETUP, CD, FM orAM buttons.

The following options are available:

Bass Set the required bass level settingbetween -10 to +10.

TrebleSet the required treble level set-ting between -10 to +10.

BalanceSet the required volume balancebetween L10 to R10.

FaderSet the required volume balancebetween R10 to F10.

✐ Fader level is only transmitted viathe front loudspeakers, the rearsignals are muted.

Volume settingsAdjusts the volume level betweenits minimum and maximum.Settings: 0 ... 35

EqualizerSet the frequency response of theselected sound sources with the 5-band equalizer (EQ OFF, JAZZ, POP,CLASSICAL, ROCK)

Press and hold SOUND button.Turn the knob to selectdesired setting.

Listening to radioIf the unit is not yet in radio mode:

Press FM or AM.✐ The unit switches to radio mode.

Select wavebandIn radio mode:

Press FM or AM to select thedesired waveband.

Available wavebands:FM 123: Memory for up to 18manually programmable FM sta-tions.FM AST: Memory for up to 6 auto-matically stored FM stations.

Selection of MWMW 1: Memory for up to 6 manu-ally programmable MW stations.MW AST: Memory for up to 6automatically stored MW stations.LW: Memory for up to 6 manuallyprogrammable LW stations.

BASS TREBLE

FADER BALANCE

3 107


AutostoreAutomatic storage of strong stationsin the current waveband (FM AST,AM AST and MW AST).

Press and hold AST button to acti-vate/deactivate this function.

✐ The maximum possible number ofstations for each band is 6.Execute “Autostore” to update thelist of the stations with strongreception (e.g. when drivingthrough different receiving areas).

Automatic searchPress the or button forthe previous/next station receiv-able station in the currently select-ed waveband.It will always starts to search forstrong signal station at LOCALsearch level. If no station can befound at LOCAL level, it willsearch at DISTANCE level.To exit, press or buttonrespectively.

Manual seekManual reception frequency setting.

Rotate the knob clock-wise or anti-clockwise to incre-ment or decrement the frequency.

Frequency ScanRadio will tune to each available sta-tion from the current waveband for10 seconds before scanning for thenext higher frequency station.

Press SCAN button to activate/deactivate the scan function.

Station memoryIn the FM 123 waveband there are18 station memories, in the “123”wavebands for MW and LW there are6 station memories each(also see “Select waveband”).

Storing preset stationsTune to the desired station.Press and hold one of the preset(1 - 6) buttons until you hear aconfirmation tone.The station selected is stored onthe preset button.

✐ You can also select a station in adifferent waveband (e.g. FM ASTor FM 123) and then store this onone of the preset buttons.

Recalling preset stationsTune to the desired station.

Select the button (1 - 6) for mem-orized station.


1083

Radio Data System (RDS) on FMMany FM stations broadcast RDSinformation.The RDS provide you with informa-tion of the following:

Traffic programme (TP)Switch this function on if you want tohear traffic announcements. You willalso hear traffic announcementswhilst a CD/ MP3 is playing.

Press the TA button to enable/dis-able funtion.Select SCAN to activate 10 secsscan for TP stations.Select or to search for TPstations.Set the required volume for thetraffic announcements in theSETUP menu.TA symbol will be displayed whenTraffic info has been activated.

If no TP stations foundIf no TP stations are found the unitwill remain at current station with dis-play ‘No TA/TP’ for 3 seconds. If TPsignal of tuned station is lost for 30seconds, it will perform an automaticTP seek for the next TP station. If noTP station is found, the unit willremain at current station with display‘TP LOST’ for 3 seconds.

TP seek will be performed period-ically every 30 secs until TP sta-tion is found.

Traffic announcements from otherstations – EONWith the RDS function EON(Enhanced Other Networks) you willhear traffic announcements even ifthe set station does not provide thisservice but is operating on a networkwith other stations.✐ If you have activated Traffic info,

stations with EON will be treatedlike traffic stations, i.e. the searchwill also stop at these stations.

✐ When a traffic announcement ismade, the unit switches to a trafficinformation station linked to EON.After the announcement, the unitreturns to the previous pro-gramme.

Alarm Messages(PTY ALARM / EON network)The unit automatically receivesemergency messages made by thebroadcaster.

Display shows ‘ALARM’.Press TA button to stop currentannouncement message and itwill not disable alarm functions.

Alternative FrequencyThis function enable or disable theautomatic tuning to an alternativefrequency with the best receptioncondition.

AF symbol will be displayed whenAF feature has been activated atthe SETUP menu.

3 109


PTY search (FM only)Searching for stations by programmetype.Select the required programme typefrom the list.

The search begins and finds thenearest station that transmits thisprogramme type.

PI seekThis function performs an automaticseek for the best-received frequencyof a RDS station with a specific PI-code.

System will trigger to search for abetter quality AF at recall/presetstation.The unit will display ‘PI SEARCH’.

Listening to CDNotes on CD

This CD player is suitable for12cm disc and 8cm disc withadaptor only and can read bothaudio and MP3 format CD.Please do not use irregularshaped CD.CD-Rs or CD-RWs can generallybe played. Due to varying qualityof CDs, surface condition of thedisc, as well as the performanceand condition of the CD writer,certain CD-R/CD-RW CD may notoperate normally on this unit.

CD playbackStarting/Stopping a disc

Press CD button to begin.Playback will stop when anothersource becomes active.

For CDP: ths disc will play back fromthe beginning of the first file.For CDC: the unit will play the nextavailable disc if there is more than 1discs.

Ejecting a discPress the button.Remove the disc from the discslot.

Previous/Next TrackPress the or buttons toselect previous or next song trackORRotary knob in clock-wise direction to seek up and anti-clockwise direction to seek down.

Fast Forward/ReversePress and hold or but-tons to for fast foward andreverse.

Random TrackPress RND button to activate/deactivate track random.

Repeat TrackPress RPT button to activate/deactivate track repeat.


1103

Scan TrackPress SCAN button to activate/deactivate track scan.CD plays the first 10 seconds ofthe song.

Listening to MP3Notes on MP3 filesThe following MP3 files are support-ed by the CD player:

Files conform with MPEG1/2 or2.5-Layer 3.The format of the CD must be ISO9660 Level 1 or Level 2 or Jolietwith sector format in Mode 1 orMode 2 Form 1. Other formatscannot be played reliably.Up to maximum number of fold-ers and number of files is 345,maximum number of folders is254 (total number of charactersdisplayed are 24).Bit rate: Maximum of 320 kbit/s,constant or variable.Sampling frequency: Maximum of48 kHz.Text display: ID3 tag V1 and ID3tag V2. MP3 tracks can containaddition information such asartist, track and album names(ID3 tags with maximum not morethan 12 characters). Charactersother than uppercase/lowercaseletters (“Aa to Zz”) and under-score (“_”) may not be displayed.

Only files with .mp3 extension arerecognized as MP3 files.The unit may not play the firsttrack in the order that you wrotethem to the disc.The unit plays only the first ses-sion if the disc contains both CDaudio tracks and MP3 files.When playing a disc of 8k bps orvariable bit rate (VBR), theelapsed playing time in the displaywindow may not be correct.Make sure that a MP3 CD-R/CD-RW is burned that is formatted asa data disc and NOT as an audiodisc.MP3 files are not compatible withpacket write data transfer.The MP3 symbol will be shown inthe display if an MP3 is beingplayed.

3 111


Starting/Stopping playbackPress CD button to start playback.Playback will stop when anothersource becomes active.

Previous/Next FolderPress the or buttons toselect previous or next folder.

Previous/Next TrackPress the or buttons toselect previous or next song trackORRotary in clockwisedirection to go to next track andanticlockwise direction to previoustrack.


RandomCDC mode*: Press and hold RNDbutton to activate or deactivaterandom in the tracks.CDP mode: Press RND button toactivate or deactivate random inthe tracks.

RepeatCDC mode*: Press and hold RPTbutton to activate or deactivaterepeat track.CDP mode: Press RPT button toactivate or deactivate repeattracks.

ScanPress the SCAN button to activateor deactivate scan track.CD plays the first 10 seconds ofthe song.When a folder ends: scanningcontinues with the first file of thenext folder.When a CD ends: scanning con-tinues with the first file of the firstfolder.

Setting TextTo retrieves text information from theMP3 files for display.

Press and hold SETUP button inMP3 mode to set information inavailable sequence Filename/Playt ime/T i t le /Ar t is t /A lbum/Directory Name.

* CD Changer version only


1123

CDC mode *(CD Changer version only)

To load single disc: Press LOADbutton.To load all discs: Press and holdLOAD button.Insert the disc with printed sidefacing up. CDC playback begins.

Ejecting a discTo eject single disc: Press the button.To eject all disc: Press and hold

button.Remove the disc from the discslot.

Starting/Stopping playbackPress CD button to start playback.Playback start from the currentdisc position in the magazine.

Direct disc accessPress button 1-6 to play thedesired CD.The CDs in the CD changer are dis-played as “CDC 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6” etc.

Previous/Next TrackPress the or buttons toselect previous or next song trackORRotary knob in clock-wise direction to go to next trackand anticlockwise direction to pre-vious track.


Random TrackPress and hold RND button toactivate or deactivate random inthe tracks.

Repeat TrackPress and hold RPT button toactivate or deactivate repeattrack.

Scan TrackPress the SCAN button to activateor deactivate scan track.CD plays the first 10 seconds ofthe song.When a last track of CD ends:scanning continues with the firsttrack of current disc.

3 113


Lift to open the lid.Please keep lid close when not inuse.

USB Hub & Auxiliary (if equipped)Notes of USB HubDue to constant changes of USBproducts in the market and theirrespective Software, it can be possi-ble that some of the USB devices arenot compatible with this head unit.It supports the formats of files:

MP3WMAOGGPress CD button to start playback.

Previous/Next FolderPress the or buttons toselect previous or next folder.

Previous/Next FilePress the or buttons toselect previous or next song fileORRotary knob in clock-wise direction to go to next trackand anticlockwise direction to pre-vious file.


Random FileCDC*: Press and hold RND but-ton to activate or deactivate ran-dom in the file.CDP: Press RND button to acti-vate or deactivate random in thefile.

Repeat FileCDC*: Press and hold RPT buttonto activate or deactivate repeat file.

CDP: Press RPT button to acti-vate or deactivate repeat file.

Scan FilePress the SCAN button to activateor deactivate scan file.CD plays the first 10 seconds ofthe song.When a last track of CD ends:scanning continues with the firsttrack of current disc.

Setting TextTo retrieves text information from theMP3 files for display.

Press and hold SETUP button inMP3 mode to set information inavailable sequence Filename/Playtime/Title/Artist/Album/Directory Name.

Auxiliary In You can input Aux in to this unit.

Press and hold CD button whenan auxiliary is connected.Playback will stop when anothersource becomes active.

* CD Changer version only

OED036062R


1143

Dual steering wheel remote control*

CH / CH . . . . Radio mode : Select preset up/down from the preset listof the current waveband

CDC : Select next or previous disc

Seek / . . . Radio mode : Select previous/next station

CD/CDC/USB : Select previous/next track

Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting the system

+ / - . . . . . . . . . . Volume control up / down

Mode . . . . . . . . . . Switchover between TUNER (FM)/CD/USB/AUX mode

Seek / . . . Radio mode: Select previous/next station

CD/CDC/USB: Select previous/next track

+ / - . . . . . . . . . . Volume control up / down

CH . . . . . . . . . . . Radio mode: Select Preset up

CDC: Next disc

Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . Switchover between TUNER (FM)/CD/USB/AUX mode

Note : To enable the following functions to be controlled by the steeringwheel keys, please ensure there is CD in the unit and USB/AUX isconnected.

* Depend on version

Single steering wheel remote control*

Steering wheel remote control

3 115


Setup menuIn the setup menu you can change toyour preferred settings.

Press the SETUP button to entersetup menu.Press SETUP button repeatedlyto access the following sub-menus.• START VOL• TA VOL• SDVC• PTY• REGIONAL• AF• MP3• SECURITY CODE

Use the knob to selectdesired settings.To exit, press SETUP, CD, FM orAM buttons.

The following options are available:

Max.start vol.Setting the maximum volume whenthe unit is switched on.Settings: 5 ... 25

When you switch on the unit, thevolume will always be set to thislevel if the volume was louderthan this level when you switchedoff.

TA vol.Setting the volume for trafficannouncement.Settings: 5 ... 25

SDVC Adjustment for speed-depend-ent volume control.Settings:

1 ... 5: Small (1) to large (5)increase in volume on accelera-tion.0: OFF, no speed-dependent vol-ume control.

PTY searchSearching for stations by programmetype.

None: No PTY1 ... 29: PTY programme type30 ... 31: Cannot be selected. Foremergency test and alarm only.Press the knob once toenter the selected PTY.The search begins and finds thenearest station that transmits thisprogramme type.

RegionalSetting the RDS regional function.Settings:

ON: The radio only tunes to alter-native frequencies of the selectedstation which transmit the sameregional programme.OFF: The radio tunes to all thealternative frequencies of theselected station even if differentregional programmes are trans-mitted.


1163

AF retuningSetting the RDS AF function.Settings:

ON: Automatic retuning to alterna-tive frequencies for the same sta-tion.OFF: No automatic retuning toalternative frequencies. The radiokeeps to the receiving frequencyset.

MP3 DisplayActivating/ deactivating text displaywith MP3 playback. The text appearsin the middle line of the screen.Settings:

FILENAME: The filename the userdefinedPLAYTIME: Song durationTITLE: Song titleARTIST: Artist of the songALBUM: Song albumDIRECTORY NAME: Song direc-tory

Security code feature

Battery reconnectionIn any event when the battery of thecar is being disconnected and recon-nected again, you will be promptedto enter your password

Enter '0000' (Default code)

User is allowed to enter the correctpassword twice. If the password isnot entered correctly after the sec-ond attempt, the unit will be locked.The unit has to be left on for 1 hour.After that, user can re-enter thepassword again.

To change the security code:Press the SETUP button to entersetup menu.Press the SETUP button repeat-edly to access the submenus("SECURITY CODE")Press the knob toselect SECURITY CODE.Enter saved password.(Refer 'To enter PASSWORD ')

Enter NEW password (Refer 'To enter PASSWORD')

. In the event when no new pass-word has been set, the defaultpassword will remain to be '0000'

To enter PASSWORD:Turn the knob tochange the digits of security code.Press knob once to goto next digit.Repeat this until you have finishedentering 4 digits.To confirm new password, pressand hold knob button.

Your new password has beensaved.

In the event if you have forgotten thepassword and the unit is ‘locked’,please approach your car authoriseddealers for assistance.

3 117


TroubleshootingIn rare instances, your radio may notfunction the way you expect it to.Before calling the service depart-ment, please read the operatinginstructions thoroughly and gothrough the following check list; itmay be possible to quickly remedyan apparent malfunction.> Symptoms• Possible cause / remedy

General> Audio/ MP3 rejected by the unit.• The CD may be dirty.• Clean the CD with a damp cloth• The CD does not comply with the

CD player’s specifications.• See “Notes on audio and MP3

CDs”

> The operating panel generatessome heat.

• No error. The unit feels warm.

> The volume decreases automati-cally. The volume can no longer beincreased.

• An integrated safety circuit pre-vents the temperature in the unitfrom exceeding a certain value.

• Allow the unit to cool down (set lowvolume).

Radio> Poor or no radio reception.• Check if the antenna is completely

and correctly connected.• Check whether the supply volt-

age’s negative pole (brown cable)is correctly connected to earth(vehicle chassis).

> FM ABC and FM AST station listhas only few or no stations.

• Antenna (disc antenna) obscured,antenna rod bent or antennadefective.

• Please arrange for an authoriseddealer to check the antenna.

> The frequency instead of the sta-tion name is displayed.

• The unit is tuned to a station thatdoes not transmit RDS signals orthe transmitter is too weak.

> The required station cannot betuned to using automatic search.

• The desired station is too weak.• Set desired station manually

(manu. tuning).• Check whether the antenna is

completely and correctly connect-ed.

> No traffic announcements areswitched through (during CDCplayback).

• Activate the traffic announcementby pressing TA button


1183

CDC / MP3> Distorted sound/ skips during CD

play.• Player cannot read CD. CD is dam-

aged or soiled.

> CD player does not work.• In cold weather conditions, con-

densation may occur on the laser.• With the set on, wait for 5 minutes

until the condensation evaporates.

> No sound during CD playback.• Some CDs contain multimedia

data which is not recognised by theunit.

• Advance the tracks until music isheard.

• See “Notes on audio and MP3CDs”.

> Problems with new copy-protectedaudio CDs.

• Some copy protection proceduresare incompatible with acceptedstandards for audio CDs. This isnot a fault on the unit

• See “Notes on audio and MP3CDs”.

4

Ignition switch / 4-3Starting the engine / 4-5Manual transaxle / 4-7Automatic transaxle / 4-10Brake system / 4-16Steering wheel / 4-22Cruise control system / 4-24Electronic stability program / 4-28Instrument cluster / 4-32

Gauges / 4-33Warnings and indicators / 4-35Trip computer / 4-43Information monitor / 4-48Back warning system / 4-50Lighting / 4-53Wipers and washers / 4-59Defroster / 4-62Hazard warning flasher / 4-63Manual climate control system / 4-64Automatic climate control system / 4-73Cool box / 4-84Windscreen defrosting and defogging / 4-85



24

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle,open the windows immediately.

• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colourless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and deathby asphyxiation.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose.If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath sideof the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorised KIA dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run theengine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in anopen area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawninto the interior.

If you must drive with the boot lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher

speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of thewindscreen are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

4 3


Illuminated ignition switch (if equipped)Whenever a door is opened, the igni-tion switch will be illuminated for yourconvenience, provided the ignitionswitch is not in the ON position. Thelight will go off approximately 30 sec-onds after closing the door or whenthe ignition switch is turned on.

Ignition switch and anti-theftsteering column lock Ignition switch positionLOCKThe steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.When turning the ignition switch tothe LOCK position, push the keyinward at the ACC position and turnthe key toward the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)The steering wheel is unlocked andelectrical accessories are operative.

ONThe warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This isthe normal running position after theengine is started.Do not leave the ignition switch ON ifthe engine is not running to preventbattery discharge.

STARTTurn the ignition key to the STARTposition to start the engine. Theengine will crank until you releasethe key; then it returns to the ONposition. The brake warning lampcan be checked in this position.

✽✽ NOTICEIf difficulty is experienced in turn-ing the ignition key to the STARTposition, turn the steering wheelright and left to release the tensionand then turn the key.

IGNITION SWITCH

OED046001 OED046002

ACCON

START

LOCK


44

WARNING - Ignition key• Never turn the ignition switch

to LOCK or ACC whilst thevehicle is moving. This wouldresult in loss of directionalcontrol and braking function,which could cause an immedi-ate accident.

• The anti-theft steering columnlock is not a substitute for theparking brake. Before leavingthe driver’s seat, always makesure the shift lever is engagedin 1st gear for manual transaxleor P (Park) for automatictransaxle, set the parkingbrake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected andsudden vehicle movementmay occur if these precau-tions are not taken.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never reach for the ignition

switch, or any other controlsthrough the steering wheelwhilst the vehicle is in motion.The presence of your hand orarm in this area could cause aloss of vehicle control, anaccident and serious bodilyinjury or death.

• Do not place any movableobjects around the driver’sseat as they may move whilstdriving, interfere with the driv-er and lead to an accident.

4 5


Starting the petrol engine

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress theclutch pedal fully and shift thetransaxle into Neutral. Keep theclutch pedal depressed whilstturning the ignition switch to thestart position.Automatic Transaxle - Place thetransaxle shift lever in P (Park).Depress the brake pedal fully.You can also start the enginewhen the shift lever is in the N(Neutral) position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to STARTand hold it there until the enginestarts (a maximum of 10 seconds),then release the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below -18°C / 0°F) or after the vehiclehas not been operated for severaldays, let the engine warm up with-out depressing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm,it should be started withoutdepressing the accelerator.

STARTING THE ENGINE

CAUTIONIf the engine stalls whilst youare in motion, do not attempt tomove the shift lever to the P(Park) position. If traffic androad conditions permit, you mayput the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position whilst thevehicle is still moving and turnthe ignition switch to the STARTposition in an attempt to restartthe engine.

CAUTIONDo not engage the starter formore than 10 seconds. If theengine stalls or fails to start,wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter. Improperuse of the starter may damageit.

WARNING Always wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels,ski boots,etc.) may interferewith your ability to use thebrake and accelerator pedal,and the clutch (if equipped).


64

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when theengine is cold, it has to be pre-heat-ed before starting the engine andthen has to be warmed up beforestarting to drive.1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and shift theTransaxle into the Neutral. Keepthe clutch pedal depressed whilstcranking the engine.Automatic Transaxle - Place theTransaxle shift lever in P(park).Depress the brake pedal fully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N(neutral)position.

3. Turn the ignition switch ON posi-tion to pre-heat the engine. Thenthe glow indicator light will illumi-nate.

4. If the glow indicator light goes out,turn the ignition switch to STARTand hold it there until the enginestarts (a maximum of 10 sec-onds), then release the key.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the engine were not started within2 seconds after the preheating is com-pleted, turn the ignition key oncemore to the LOCK position during10 seconds, and then to the ON posi-tion, in order to preheat again.

Starting and stopping theengine for turbocharger intercooler 1. Do not race or accelerate the

engine immediately after starting.If the engine is cold, idle for sever-al seconds before sufficient lubri-cation is ensured in the tur-bocharger unit.

2. After high speed or extended driv-ing, requiring a heavy engine load,idle the engine about 1 minutebefore turning it off.This idle time will allow the tur-bocharger to cool prior to shuttingthe engine off.

W-60

Glow indicator light

CAUTIONDo not turn the engine off imme-diately after it has been subject-ed to a heavy load. Doing somay cause severe damage tothe engine or turbocharger unit.

4 7


Manual transaxle operationThe manual transaxle has five/six (ifequipped) forward gears.Press the clutch pedal down fullywhilst shifting, then release it slowly.The gearshift lever must be returnedto the neutral position before shiftinginto R (Reverse).

Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped before shifting into R(Reverse).Never operate the engine with thetachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

• During cold weather, shifting maybe difficult until the transaxle lubri-cant has warmed up. This is nor-mal and not harmful to thetransaxle.

• If you've come to a complete stopand it's hard to shift into 1st orR(Reverse), put the shift lever inN(Neutral) position and release theclutch. Press the clutch pedal backdown, and then shift into 1st orR(Reverse) gear position.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

OED046003

The ring (1) must be pulled whilstmoving the shift lever.

The shift lever can be moved withoutpulling the ring (1).

Type A

Type B

CAUTION• When downshifting from fifth

gear to fourth gear, cautionshould be taken not to inad-vertently press the gear shiftlever sideways in such a man-ner that second gear isengaged. Such a drasticdownshift may cause theengine speed to increase tothe point that the tachometerwill enter the red-zone. Suchover-revving of the enginemay possibly cause enginedamage.

• Do not downshift more than 2gears or downshift the gearwhen the engine is running athigh speed (5,000 RPM orhigher). Such a downshiftingmay damage the engine.

CAUTION• To avoid premature clutch

wear and damage, do notdrive with your foot resting onthe clutch pedal. Also, don’tuse the clutch to hold thevehicle stopped on an uphillgrade, whilst waiting for a traf-fic light, etc.

• Do not use the shift lever as ahandrest during driving, asthis can result in prematurewear of the transaxle shiftforks.


84

Using the clutchThe clutch should be pressed all theway to the floor before shifting, thenreleased slowly. The clutch pedalshould always be fully releasedwhilst driving. Do not rest your footon the clutch pedal whilst driving.This can cause unnecessary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch tohold the car on an incline. This caus-es unnecessary wear. Use the footbrake or parking brake to hold thecar on an incline. Do not operate theclutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

DownshiftingWhen you must slow down in heavytraffic or whilst driving up steep hills,downshift before the engine starts tolabour. Downshifting reduces thechance of stalling and gives betteracceleration when you again need toincrease your speed. When the vehi-cle is traveling down steep hills,downshifting helps maintain safespeed and prolongs brake life.

WARNING - Manualtransaxle

Before leaving the driver’s seat,always set the parking brakefully and shut the engine off.Then make sure the transaxle isshifted into 1st gear when thevehicle is parked on a level oruphill grade, and shifted into R(Reverse) on a downhill grade.Unexpected and sudden vehiclemovement can occur if theseprecautions are not followed inthe order identified.

4 9


Good driving practices• Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This is extremelyhazardous. Always leave the car ingear.

• Don't "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and mal-function. Instead, when you aredriving down a long hill, slow downand shift to a lower gear. When youdo this, engine braking will helpslow the car.

• Slow down before shifting to alower gear. This will help avoidover-revving the engine, which cancause damage.

• Slow down when you encountercross winds. This gives you muchbetter control of your car.

• Be sure the car is completelystopped before you attempt to shiftinto reverse. The transaxle can bedamaged if you do not. To shift intoreverse, depress the clutch, movethe shift lever to neutral, wait 3 sec-onds, then shift to the reverse posi-tion.

• Exercise extreme caution whendriving on a slippery surface. Beespecially careful when braking,accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt changein vehicle speed can cause thedrive wheels to lose traction andthe vehicle to go out of control.

(Continued)• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose controlof your vehicle at highwayspeeds.

• Loss of control often occurs iftwo or more wheels drop offthe roadway and the driveroversteers to reenter the road-way.

• In the event your vehicleleaves the roadway, do notsteer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back intothe travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speedlimits.

WARNING • Always buckle-up! In a colli-

sion, an unbelted occupant issignificantly more likely to beseriously injured or killed thana properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cor-nering or turning.

• Do not make quick steeringwheel movements, such assharp lane changes or fast,sharp turns.

(Continued)


104

Automatic transaxle operationAll normal forward driving is donewith the shift lever in the D (Drive)position.To move the shift lever from the P(Park) position, the brake pedal mustbe depressed.

For smooth operation, depress thebrake pedal when shifting from N(Neutral) to a forward or reversegear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

OED046004R

Depress the brake pedal when shifting.

The shift lever can be moved freely.

WARNING - Automatictransaxle

Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift leveris in the P (PARK) position; thenset the parking brake fully andshut the engine off. Unexpectedand sudden vehicle movementcan occur if these precautionsare not followed in the orderidentified.

4 11


Transaxle rangesP (park)This position locks the transaxle andprevents the front wheels from rotat-ing. Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting into this position.

✽✽ NOTICEThe transaxle may be damaged ifyou shift into P (Park) whilst thevehicle is in motion.

CAUTION• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not acceleratethe engine in R (Reverse) orany forward gear position withthe brakes on.

• When stopped on an upgrade,do not hold the vehicle sta-tionary with engine power.Use the service brake or theparking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral)or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R(Reverse) when the engine isabove idle speed.

(Continued)• Before leaving the driver’s

seat, always make sure theshift lever is in the P (PARK)position. Set the parkingbrake fully, shut the engine offand take the key with you.Unexpected and sudden vehi-cle movement can occur if youdo not follow these precau-tions in the order specified.

• Never leave a child unattend-ed in a vehicle.

WARNING• Shifting into P (Park) whilst

the vehicle is in motion willcause the drive wheels to lockwhich will cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) posi-tion in place of the parkingbrake. Always make sure theshift lever is latched in the P(Park) position so that it can-not be moved AND set theparking brake fully.

(Continued)


124

R (reverse)Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

✽✽ NOTICEAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransaxle if you shift into R whilstthe vehicle is in motion, except asexplained in “Rocking the Vehicle”,in this manual.

N (neutral)With the gearshift in the N position,the wheels and transaxle are notlocked. The vehicle will roll freelyeven on the slightest incline unlessthe parking brake or service brakesare applied.

D (drive)This is the normal forward drivingposition. The transaxle will automati-cally shift through a 4-gearsequence, providing the best fueleconomy and power.For extra power when passing anoth-er vehicle or climbing grades,depress the accelerator fully, atwhich time the transaxle will auto-matically downshift to the next lowergear.

3 (Third Gear, if equipped)Move the shift lever to this position fortowing a trailer during hill climbing.This position also provides enginebraking when going down hills.

2 (Second Gear)Use 2 (Second Gear) for more powerwhen climbing hills and for increasedbraking when going down hills. Thisposition also helps reduce wheelspin on slippery surfaces. When theshift lever is placed in 2 (SecondGear), the transaxle will automatical-ly shift from first to second gear.

1 (First gear)Move the shift lever to this position inhard pulling situations and for climb-ing steep grades.

CAUTIONDo not exceed the recommend-ed maximum speeds in 2(Second Gear) or 1 (First Gear).Operating the vehicle at speedsabove the maximum recom-mended, for 2 (Second Gear) or1 (First Gear) may cause exces-sive heat to develop whichcould result in damage to or fail-ure of the automatic transaxle.

4 13


Moving up a steep grade froma standing startTo move up a steep grade from astanding start, depress the brakepedal, shift the shift lever to D(Drive). Select the appropriate geardepending on load weight and steep-ness of the grade, and release theparking brake. Depress the accelera-tor gradually whilst releasing theservice brakes.When accelerating from a stop ona steep hill, the vehicle may have atendency to roll backwards.Shifting the shift lever into 2(Second Gear) will help preventthe vehicle from rolling back-wards.

Shift lock system (if equipped)For your safety, the automatictransaxle has a shift lock systemwhich prevents shifting the transaxlefrom P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R(Reverse) unless the brake pedal isdepressed.To shift the transaxle from P (Park) orN (Neutral) into R (Reverse):1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.2. Start the engine or turn the ignition

switch to the ON position.3. Move the shift lever.If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with theshift lever in the P (Park) position, achattering noise near the shift levermay be heard. This is a normal con-dition.

Shift-lock overrideIf the shift lever cannot be movedfrom the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-tion into R (Reverse) position withthe brake pedal depressed, continuedepressing the brake, then do the fol-lowing:1. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-

ering the shift-lock overrideaccess hole.

2. Insert a screwdriver (or key) intothe access hole and press downon the screwdriver (or key).

3. Move the shift lever.4. Have your vehicle inspected by an

authorised KIA dealer immediately.

OED046005R

WARNING Always fully depress the brakepedal before and whilst shiftingout of the P (Park) position intoanother position to avoid inad-vertent motion of the vehiclewhich could injure persons in oraround the car.


144

Good driving practices• Never move the gear selector lever

from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to anyother position with the acceleratorpedal depressed.

• Never move the gear selector leverinto P (Park) when the vehicle is inmotion.

• Be sure the car is completelystopped before you attempt to shiftinto R (Reverse).

• Never take the car out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may beextremely hazardous. Always leavethe car in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and mal-function. Instead, when you are driv-ing down a long hill, slow down andshift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow thecar.

• Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear maynot be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake.Do notdepend on placing the transaxle in P(Park) to keep the car from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution whendriving on a slippery surface. Beespecially careful when braking,accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt changein vehicle speed can cause thedrive wheels to lose traction andthe vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothlydepressing and releasing theaccelerator pedal.

WARNING• Always buckle-up! In a colli-

sion, an unbelted occupant issignificantly more likely to beseriously injured or killed thana properly belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cor-nering or turning.

• Do not make quick steeringwheel movements, such assharp lane changes or fast,sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control ofyour vehicle at highway speeds.

(Continued)

4 15


(Continued)• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop offthe roadway and the driveroversteers to reenter the road-way.

• In the event your vehicleleaves the roadway, do notsteer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back intothe travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speedlimits.

WARNING If your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then youmay attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward andbackward. Do not attempt thisprocedure if people or objectsare anywhere near the vehicle.During the rocking operationthe vehicle may suddenly moveforward of backward as itbecomes unstuck, causinginjury or damage to nearby peo-ple or objects.


164

Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assistedbrakes that adjust automaticallythrough normal usage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of astalled engine or some other reason,you can still stop your vehicle byapplying greater force to the brakepedal than you normally would. Thestopping distance, however, will belonger.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partiallydepleted each time the brake pedalis applied. Do not pump the brakepedal when the power assist hasbeen interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only whennecessary to maintain steering con-trol on slippery surfaces.

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate whilstthe vehicle is in motion, you canmake an emergency stop with theparking brake. The stopping dis-tance, however, will be much greaterthan normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING - Parking brakePulling the parking brake whilstthe vehicle is moving at normalspeeds can cause a suddenloss of control of the vehicle. Ifyou must use the parking braketo stop the vehicle, use greatcaution in applying the brake.

WARNING - Brakes• Do not drive with your foot

resting on the brake pedal.This will create abnormal highbrake temperatures, exces-sive brake lining and padwear, and increased stoppingdistances.

• When descending a long orsteep hill, shift to a lower gearand avoid continuous applica-tion of the brakes. Continuousbrake application will causethe brakes to overheat andcould result in a temporaryloss of braking performance.

(Continued)

4 17


Disc brakes wear indicator Your vehicle has disc brakes.When your brake pads are worn andit's time for new pads, you will hear ahigh-pitched warning sound fromyour front brakes or rear brakes (ifequipped). You may hear this soundcome and go or it may occur when-ever you depress the brake pedal.Please remember that some drivingconditions or climates may cause abrake squeal when you first apply (orlightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-mal and does not indicate a problemwith your brakes.

WARNING - Brake wearThis brake wear warning soundmeans your vehicle needs serv-ice. If you ignore this audiblewarning, you will eventually losebraking performance, whichcould lead to a serious accident.

CAUTIONAlways replace brake pads ascomplete front or rear axle sets.

(Continued)• Wet brakes may result in the

vehicle not slowing down atthe usual rate and pulling toone side when the brakes areapplied. Applying the brakeslightly will indicate whetherthey have been affected in thisway. Always test your brakesin this fashion after drivingthrough deep water. To dry thebrakes, apply them lightlywhilst maintaining a safe for-ward speed until brake per-formance returns to normal.

CAUTIONTo avoid costly brake repairs, donot continue to drive with wornbrake pads.


184

Parking brake To engage the parking brake, firstapply the foot brake and then withoutpressing the release button in, pullthe parking brake lever up as far aspossible. In addition it is recommend-ed that when parking the vehicle ona gradient, the shift lever should be ina low gear on manual transaxle vehi-cles or in the Park position on auto-matic transaxle vehicles.

To release the parking brake, firstapply the foot brake and pull up theparking brake lever slightly.Secondly, depress the release buttonand lower the parking brake leverwhilst holding the button.

CAUTIONDriving with the parking brakeapplied will cause excessivebrake pad and brake rotor wear.

OED046006R OED046007R

WARNING - Parking brake• To prevent unintentional

movement when stopped andleaving the vehicle, do not usethe gearshift lever in place ofthe parking brake. Set theparking brake AND make surethe gearshift lever is securelypositioned in 1st (First) gearor R (Reverse) for manualtransaxle equipped vehiclesand in P (Park) for automatictransaxle equipped vehicles.

• Never allow a person who isunfamiliar with the vehicle orchildren to touch the parkingbrake. If the parking brake isreleased unintentionally, seri-ous injury may occur.

4 19


Check the brake warning light byturning the ignition switch ON (do notstart the engine). This light will beilluminated when the parking brake isapplied with the ignition switch in theSTART or ON position.Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off.

If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is released,there may be a malfunction in thebrake system. Immediate attention isnecessary.If at all possible, cease driving thevehicle immediately. If that is not pos-sible, use extreme caution whilstoperating the vehicle and only con-tinue to drive the vehicle until youcan reach a safe location or repairshop.

Parking on curbed streets • When parking your vehicle on an

uphill grade, park as close to thecurb as possible and turn the frontwheels away from the curb so thatthe front wheels will contact thecurb if the vehicle moves back-ward.

• When parking your vehicle on adownhill grade, park as close to thecurb as possible and turn the frontwheels toward the curb so that thefront wheels will contact the curb ifthe vehicle moves forward.

W-75


204

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)(if equipped)

The ABS system continuously sens-es the speed of the wheels. If thewheels are going to lock, the ABSsystem repeatedly modulates thehydraulic brake pressure to thewheels.When you apply your brakes underconditions which may lock thewheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-responding sensation in the brakepedal. This is normal and it meansyour ABS system is active.In order to obtain the maximum ben-efit from your ABS system in anemergency situation, do not attemptto modulate your brake pressure anddo not try to pump your brakes.Press your brake pedal as hard aspossible or as hard as the situationwarrants and allow the ABS systemto control the force being delivered tothe brakes.

• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-tem, your vehicle still requires suf-ficient stopping distance. Alwaysmaintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannotprevent accidents resulting fromexcessive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brakesystem may result in a longer stop-ping distance than for vehiclesequipped with a conventionalbrake system.

WARNING - ABS BrakesYour ABS is not a substitute forgood driving judgement. Youcan still have an accident. Infact, your ABS system will prob-ably not be able to prevent anaccident in the following drivingconditions:• Dangerous driving, such as

neglecting safety precautions,speeding, or driving too closeto the vehicle in front of you.

• Driving at high speed in situa-tions providing considerablyless traction, such as wet con-ditions where hydroplaningcould occur.

• Driving too fast on poor roadsurfaces. The ABS isdesigned to improve maxi-mum braking effectiveness ontypical highways and roads ingood condition. On poor roadsurfaces in poor condition,the ABS may actually reducebraking effectiveness.

4 21


✽✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, theengine may not run as smoothly andthe ABS warning light may turn onat the same time. This happensbecause of the low battery voltage. Itdoes not mean your ABS is malfunc-tioning.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

ABS

W-78

CAUTION• If the ABS warning light is on

and stays on, you may have aproblem with the ABS system.In this case, however, your reg-ular brakes will work normally.

• The ABS warning light will stayon for approximately 3 sec-onds after the ignition switchis ON. During that time, theABS will go through self-diag-nosis and the light will go off ifeverything is normal. If thelight stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS sys-tem. Contact an authorised Kiadealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION• When you drive on a road hav-

ing poor traction, such as anicy road, and operate yourbrakes continuously, the ABSwill be active continuouslyand the ABS warning lightmay illuminate. Pull your carover to a safe place and stopthe engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABSwarning light is off, then yourABS system is normal.Otherwise, you may have aproblem with the ABS.Contact an authorised Kiadealer as soon as possible.


224

Electronic power steering Power steering uses the motor toassist you in steering the vehicle. Ifthe engine is off or if the power steer-ing system becomes inoperative, thevehicle may still be steered, but it willrequire increased steering effort.The motor driven power steering iscontrolled by power steering controlunit which sense the steering wheeltorque, steering wheel position andvehicle speed to command themotor.The steering wheel becomes heavieras the vehicle’s speed increases andbecomes lighter as the vehicle’sspeed decreases for the better con-trol of the steering wheel.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the powersteering checked by an authorisedKia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEThe following symptoms may occurduring normal vehicle operation:• The EPS warning light does not

illuminate.• The steering wheel becomes heav-

ier after turning the ignition switchon. This happens as the systemperforms the EPS system diagnos-tics. When the diagnostics is com-pleted, the steering wheel willreturn to its normal condition.

• Click noise may be heard from theEPS relay after the ignition switchis turned to the ON or LOCK posi-tion.

• Motor noise may be heard whenthe vehicle is at a stop or at a lowdriving speed.

• The steering effort can suddenlyincrease, if the operation of EPSsystem is stopped to prevent seri-ous accidents when the malfunc-tion of EPS system is detected byself-diagnosis.

Tilt steering (if equipped)A tilt steering wheel allows you toadjust the steering wheel before youdrive.You can also raise it to thehighest level to give your legs moreroom when you exit and enter thevehicle.

The steering wheel should be posi-tioned so that it is comfortable foryou to drive, whilst permitting you tosee the instrument panel warninglights and gauges.

STEERING WHEEL

WARNING • Never adjust the angle of

steering wheel whilst driving.You may lose your steeringcontrol and cause severe per-sonal injury or accidents.

• After adjusting, push thesteering wheel both up anddown to be certain it is lockedin position.

4 23


To change the steering wheel angle,pull down (1) the lock release lever,adjust the steering wheel to thedesired angle (2), then pull up thelock-release lever to lock the steeringwheel in place.Be sure to adjust the steering wheelto the desired position before driving.

HornTo sound the horn, press the hornsymbol on your steering wheel.Check the horn regularly to be sure itoperates properly.

CAUTION• To sound the horn, press the

area indicated by the hornsymbol on your steeringwheel (see illustration). Thehorn will operate only whenthis area is pressed.

• Do not strike the horn severelyto operate it, or hit it with yourfist. Do not press on the hornwith a sharp-pointed object.OED046009ROED046008R


244

The cruise control system allows youto program the vehicle to maintain aconstant speed without resting yourfoot on the accelerator pedal.This system is designed to functionabove approximately 40 km/h (24mph).

To set cruise control speed:1. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF button

on the steering wheel, to turn thesystem on. The CRUISE indicatorlight ( ) in the instrument clus-ter will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed,which must be more than 40 km/h(24 mph).

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Cruise control

Do not use the cruise controlfeature under the following con-ditions:• Heavy or unsteady traffic• Slippery or winding roads• Situations that involve varying

speeds

WARNINGIf the cruise control is left on,(CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster illuminated)the cruise control can beswitched on accidentally. Keepthe cruise control system off(CRUISE indicator light OFF)when cruise control is not inuse.

OED046010

4 25


3. Push the SET (-) switch, andrelease it at the speed you want.The “SET” indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.Release the accelerator at thesame time. The desired speed willautomatically be maintained.

The SET function cannot be activateduntil approximately 2 seconds after theCRUISE ON-OFF button has beenengaged.On a steep grade, the vehicle maymomentarily slow down whilst goingdownhill.

To cancel cruise control, doone of the following:• Press the brake pedal.• Press the clutch pedal with a manu-

al transaxle or shift into N (Neutral)with an automatic transaxle.

• Push the cancel switchEach of these actions will cancelcruise control operation (the “SET”indicator light in the instrument clus-ter will go OFF), but it will not turn thesystem off. If you wish to resumecruise control operation, push the + switch located on your steeringwheel. You will return to your previ-ously preset speed.

To turn cruise control off, doone of the following:• Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button

(the CRUISE ( ) indicator lightin the instrument cluster will goOFF).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruisecontrol operation. If you want toresume cruise control operation,repeat the steps provided in “To SetCruise Control Speed” on the previ-ous page.

OED046011 OED046012


264

To increase cruise control setspeed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the + switch and hold it. Your

vehicle will accelerate. Release theswitch at the speed you want.

• Push the + switch and release itimmediately. The cruising speed willincrease 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by onetouch and will be memorized to thereset speed.

To temporarily accelerate withthe cruise control onIf you want to speed up temporarilywhen the cruise control is on,depress the accelerator pedal.Increased speed will not interferewith cruise control operation orchange the set speed.To return to the set speed, take yourfoot off the accelerator.

To decrease the cruisingspeed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the - switch and hold it. Your

vehicle will gradually slow down.Release the switch at the speedyou want to maintain.

• Push the - switch and release itimmediately. The cruising speedwill decrease 1.6 km/h (1 mph) byone touch and will be memorizedto the reset speed.

OED046013 OED046011

4 27


To resume cruising speed atmore than 40 km/h (24 mph):If any method other than theCRUISE ON-OFF switch was usedto cancel cruising speed and the sys-tem is still activated, the most recentset speed will automatically resumewhen the + switch is pushed.It will not resume, however, if thevehicle speed has dropped below 40 km/h (24 mph).

OED046013


284

Electronic stability program(ESP) (if equipped)The Electronic Stability Program(ESP) system is designed to stabilizethe vehicle during corneringmanoeuvres. ESP checks where youare steering and where the vehicle isactually going. ESP applies thebrakes at individual wheels and inter-venes in the engine managementsystem to stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Program(ESP) system is an electronic sys-tem designed to help the driver main-tain vehicle control under adverseconditions. It is not a substitute forsafe driving practices. Factors includ-ing speed, road conditions and driv-er steering input can all affectwhether ESP will be effective in pre-venting a loss of control. It is still yourresponsibility to drive and corner atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.When you apply your brakes underconditions which may lock thewheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-responding sensation in the brakepedal. This is normal and it meansyour ESP is active.

✽✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehi-cle begins to move after the engine isstarted. These conditions are normaland indicate that the ElectronicStability Program System is func-tioning properly.

ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (IF EQUIPPED)

OED046014R

WARNING Never drive too fast for the roadconditions or too quickly whencornering. Electronic stabilityprogram (ESP) will not preventaccidents. Excessive speed inturns, abrupt manoeuvres andhydroplaning on wet surfacescan still result in serious acci-dents. Only a safe and attentivedriver can prevent accidents byavoiding manoeuvres thatcause the vehicle to lose trac-tion. Even with ESP installed,always follow all the normal pre-cautions for driving - includingdriving at safe speeds for theconditions.

4 29


ESP operationESP ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, ESP and ESP OFFindicator lights illuminatefor approximately 3 sec-onds, then ESP is turnedon.

• Press the ESP OFF buttonfor at least half a secondafter turning the ignitionON to turn ESP off. (ESPOFF indicator will illumi-nate). To turn the ESP on,press the ESP OFF button(ESP OFF indicator lightwill go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tick-ing sound. This is the ESPperforming an automaticsystem self-check anddoes not indicate a prob-lem.

When operatingWhen the ESP is in opera-tion, ESP indicator lightblinks.• When the Electronic

Stability Program is oper-ating properly, you can feela slight pulsation in thevehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control andindicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of themud or slippery road,pressing the acceleratorpedal may not cause theengine rpm (revolutionsper minute) to increase.

ESP operation offESP OFF state

• To cancel ESP operation,press the ESP OFF button(ESP OFF indicator lightilluminates).

• If the ignition switch isturned to LOCK positionwhen ESP is off, ESPremains off. Upon restart-ing the engine, the ESPwill automatically turn onagain.

-ESP

ESPOFF


304

Indicator lightWhen ignition switch is turned to ON,the indicator light illuminates, thengoes off if ESP system is operatingnormally.The ESP indicator light blinks when-ever ESP is operating.ESP OFF indicator light comes onwhen either the ESP is turned offwith the button, or ESP fails to oper-ate when turned on.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter reconnecting or recharging adischarged battery, the ESP OFFindicator may illuminate.In this case, turn the handle half wayto the left and right whilst the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.Then, restart the engine after theignition is off. The ESP OFF indica-tor may turn off. If the ESP OFFindicator does not turn off, have thesystem checked by an authorised Kiadealer as soon as possible.

WARNINGThe Electronic Stability Programsystem is only a driving aid; useprecautions for safe driving byslowing down on curved, snowy,or icy roads. Drive slowly anddon’t attempt to acceleratewhenever the ESP indicator lightis blinking, or when the road sur-face is slippery.

ESP

ESPOFF

■ ESP indicator light (blinks)

■ ESP OFF indicator light (comes on)

CAUTIONDriving with varying tyre orwheel sizes may cause the ESPsystem to malfunction. Whenreplacing tyres, make sure theyare the same size as your origi-nal tyres.

4 31


ESP OFF usageWhen driving• It’s a good idea to keep the ESP

turned on for daily driving whenev-er possible.

• To turn ESP off whilst driving,press the ESP OFF button whilstdriving on a flat road surface.

Never press ESP OFF button whilstESP is operating (ESP indicator lightblinks).If ESP is turned off whilst ESP isoperating, the vehicle may slip out ofcontrol.

✽✽ NOTICE• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESPis turned off (ESP OFF light illu-minated). If the ESP is left on, itmay prevent the vehicle speedfrom increasing, and result in falsediagnosis.

• Turning the ESP off does notaffect ABS or brake system opera-tion.

WARNING Never press the ESP OFF buttonwhilst ESP is operating.If the ESP is turned off whilstESP is operating, the vehiclemay go out of control.To turn ESP off whilst driving,press the ESP OFF button whilstdriving on a flat road surface.


324

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine temperature gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Shift position indicator (Automatic transaxle only)

7. Odometer / Tripmeter

8. Tripmeter mode/reset button

9. Fuel gauge

OED046015R/OED046071R/OED046018R

■■ Petrol Engine

■■ Diesel Engine

Type A (if equipped) Type B (if equipped)

4 33


Speedometer The speedometer indicates the for-ward speed of the vehicle.

Odometer/TripmeterYou can choose the odometer, trip-meter A and tripmeter B by pressingthe tripmeter mode button.

OdometerThe odometer indicates the total dis-tance the vehicle has been driven.

TripmeterTRIP A: Tripmeter ATRIP B: Tripmeter BThe tripmeter indicates the distanceof individual trips selected by thedriver. Tripmeter A and B can bereset to 0 by pressing the reset but-ton for 1 second or more, and thenreleasing.

Tachometer The tachometer indicates theapproximate number of engine revo-lutions per minute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the cor-rect shift points and to prevent lug-ging and/or over-revving the engine.The tachometer pointer may moveslightly when the ignition switch is inACC or ON position with the engineOFF. This movement is normal andwill not affect the accuracy of thetachometer once the engine is run-ning.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not operate the engine within thetachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe engine dam-age.

Engine temperature gauge This gauge shows the temperatureof the engine coolant when the igni-tion switch is ON.Do not continue driving with an over-heated engine. If your vehicle over-heats, refer to “Overheating” in theIndex.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the gauge pointer moves beyondthe normal range area toward the“130” position, it indicates overheat-ing that may damage the engine.

GAUGES


344

Fuel gaugeThe fuel gauge indicates the approx-imate amount of fuel remaining in thefuel tank. The fuel tank capacity isgiven in chapter 8. The fuel gauge issupplemented by a low fuel warninglight, which will illuminate when thefuel tank is near empty.On inclines or curves, the fuel gaugepointer may fluctuate or the low fuelwarning light may come on earlierthan usual due to the movement offuel in the tank. Instrument panel illumination

(if equipped)When the vehicle’s parking lights orheadlights are on, rotate the illumina-tion control knob to adjust the instru-ment panel illumination intensity.

WARNING - Fuel gaugeRunning out of fuel can exposevehicle occupants to danger.You must stop and obtain addi-tional fuel as soon as possibleafter the warning light comes onor when the gauge indicatorcomes close to the ‘0’ level.

OED046026R

4 35


Checking operation All warning lights are checked byturning the ignition switch ON (do notstart the engine). Any light that doesnot illuminate should be checked byan Authorised Kia Dealer.After starting the engine, check tomake sure that all warning lights areoff. If any are still on, this indicates asituation that needs attention. Whenreleasing the parking brake, thebrake system warning light should gooff. The fuel warning light will stay onif the fuel level is low.

Anti-lock brake sys-tem (ABS) warninglight (if equipped) This light illuminates if the key isturned to ON and goes off in approx-imately 3 seconds if the system isoperating normally.If the light stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS system.Contact an authorised Kia dealer assoon as possible.

Electronic brake forcedistribution (EBD)system warning light (if equipped)If two warning lights illumi-nate at the same timewhilst driving, your vehiclehas a problem with ABSand EBD system.

In this case, your ABS system andregular brake system may not worknormally. Have the vehicle checkedby an Authorised Kia Dealer as soonas possible.

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

ABS

ABS

WARNINGIf the both ABS and Brake warn-ing lights are ON and stay ON,your vehicle’s brake system willnot work normally. So you mayexperience an unexpected anddangerous situation during sud-den braking. In this case, avoidhigh speed driving and abruptbraking. Have your vehiclechecked by Authorised KiaDealer as soon as possible.


364

CAUTIONIf the engine is not stoppedimmediately, severe damagecould result.

Engine oil pressurewarning

This warning light indicates theengine oil pressure is low.If the warning light illuminates whilstdriving:1. Drive safely to the side of the road

and stop.2. With the engine off, check the

engine oil level. If the level is low,add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on afteradding oil or if oil is not available, callan Authorised Kia Dealer.

Charging system warning

This warning light indicates a mal-function of either the generator orelectrical charging system.If the warning light comes on whilstthe vehicle is in motion:1. Drive to the nearest safe location.2. With the engine off, check the gen-

erator drive belt for looseness orbreakage.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, aproblem exists somewhere in theelectrical charging system. Havean Authorised Kia Dealer correctthe problem as soon as possible.

Seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver and pas-senger, seat belt warning light willblink or illuminate for approximately 6seconds each time you turn the igni-tion switch ON.For details, refer to the seat belt onchapter 3.

Shift pattern indicators(if equipped)

The individual indicators illuminate toshow the automatic transaxle shiftlever selection.

4 37


Immobiliser indicator (if equipped)

This light illuminates when the immo-biliser key is inserted and turned tothe ON position to start the engine.If this light turns off or blinks whenthe ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion before starting the engine, havethe system checked by an authorisedKia Dealer.

Parking brake & brakefluid warning Parking brake warning This light is illuminated when theparking brake is applied with the igni-tion switch in the START or ON posi-tion. The warning light should go offwhen the parking brake is released.

Low brake fluid level warningIf the warning light remains on, it mayindicate that the brake fluid level inthe reservoir is low.If the warning light remains on:1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.2. With the engine stopped, check

the brake fluid level immediatelyand add fluid as required. Thencheck all brake components forfluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaksare found, the warning lightremains on or the brakes do notoperate properly. Have it towed toany Authorised Kia Dealer for abrake system inspection and nec-essary repairs.

To check bulb operation, checkwhether the parking brake and brakefluid warning light illuminates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

WARNINGDriving the vehicle with a warn-ing light on is dangerous. If thebrake warning light remains on,have the brakes checked andrepaired immediately by anauthorised Kia Dealer.


384

CHECKCHECK

Rear hatchwarning (if equipped)

This warning light activates when therear hatch is not closed securely.

Low fuel level warning

This warning light indicates the fueltank is nearly empty. The warninglight will come on when the fuel levelhas dropped to about 8 litres. Refuelas soon as possible.

Door ajar warning

This warning light illuminates when adoor is not closed securely with theignition in any position.

Headlight high beamindicator

This indicator illuminates when theheadlights are on and in the highbeam position or when the turn sig-nal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Front fog light indica-tor (if equipped)

This light comes on when the frontfog lights are ON.

Rear Fog lightIndicator (if equipped)

This light comes on when the rearfog lights are ON.

Malfunction indicator (if equipped)

This indicator light is part of theEngine Control System which moni-tors various emission control systemcomponents. If this light illuminateswhilst driving, it indicates that apotential problem has been detectedsomewhere in the emission controlsystem.This light will also illuminate whenthe ignition switch is turned to theON position, and will go out in a fewseconds after the engine is started. Ifit illuminates whilst driving, or doesnot illuminate when the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position,take your vehicle to your nearestauthorised KIA dealer and have thesystem checked.Generally, your vehicle will continueto be drivable and will not need tow-ing, but have the system checked byan authorised Kia Dealer as soon aspossible.

4 39


Low washer fluid levelwarning indicator (if equipped)This warning light indicates thewasher fluid reservoir is near empty.Refill the washer fluid as soon aspossible.

Auto cruise indicator(if equipped)CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates whenthe cruise control system is enabled.

SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates whenthe cruise function switch (-) is ON.

CAUTION• Prolonged driving with the

Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light ( ) illuminated may causedamage to the emission con-trol systems which couldeffect drivability and/or fueleconomy.

• If the Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light( ) begins to flash ON andOFF, potential catalytic con-verter damage is possiblewhich could result in loss ofengine power. Have the EngineControl System inspected assoon as possible by an autho-rised Kia Dealer.

CHECKCHECK

CHECKCHECK

CAUTION - Diesel engine(if equipped)

If the malfunction indicator lightblinking, have the ParticulateFilter System inspected by anauthorised KIA dealer (beforedriving more than 50 km/31miles).

SET


404

Air bag warning (if equipped)

This warning light will blink or illumi-nate for approximately 6 secondseach time you turn the ignition switchto the ON position.If this indicator does not go out, or ifit illuminates whilst the vehicle isbeing driven, see an authorised KiaDealer for immediate service.

Front passenger’s airbag OFF indicator (if equipped)The front passenger’s air bag OFFindicator illuminates for about 4 sec-onds after the ignition switch isturned to the ON position.The front passenger’s air bag OFFindicator also comes on when thefront passenger’s air bag ON/OFFswitch is set to OFF position andturns off when the front passenger’sair bag ON/OFF switch is set to ONposition.

AIR BAG

CAUTIONIf there is a malfunction of thefront passenger’s air bagON/OFF switch, the front pas-senger’s air bag OFF indicatorwill not illuminate and the frontpassenger’s air bag will inflatein frontal impact crashes even ifthe front passenger’s air bagON/OFF switch is set to OFFposition.If this occurs, have an autho-rised KIA dealer inspect thepassenger’s front air bagON/OFF switch and the SRS airbag system as soon as possi-ble.

4 41


ESP indicator(Electronic StabilityProgram) (if equipped)The ESP indicator will illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turnedON, but should go off after approxi-mately 3 seconds. When the ESP ison, it monitors the driving conditionsand under normal driving conditions,the ESP light will remain off. When aslippery or low traction condition isencountered, the ESP will operate,and the ESP indicator will blink toindicate the ESP is operating.

ESP OFF indicator (if equipped)

The ESP OFF indicator will illumi-nate when the ignition switch isturned ON, but should go off afterapproximately 3 seconds. To switchto ESP OFF mode, press the ESPOFF button. The ESP OFF indicatorwill illuminate indicating the ESP isdeactivated. If this indicator stays onwhen ESP OFF is not selected, theESP may have a malfunction. Takeyour car to an authorised KIA dealerand have the system checked.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter reconnecting or recharging adischarged battery, the ESP OFFindicator may illuminate.In this case, turn the handle half wayto the left and right whilst the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.Then, restart the engine after theignition is off. The ESP OFF indica-tor may turn off. If the ESP OFFindicator does not turn off, have thesystem checked by an authorised Kiadealer as soon as possible.

ESP ESPOFF


424

Electric power steer-ing system(EPS) warn-ing Light (if equipped,diesel engine only)This indicator light comes on afterthe ignition key is turned to the ONposition and then it will go out whenthe engine starts. This light alsocomes on when the EPS has sometroubles.If it comes on whilst driving, haveyour vehicle inspected by an autho-rised Kia dealer.

Glow indicator(Diesel engine only)

This light is turned on during warm-up and turned off after it.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the glow indicator continues toilluminate after the engine haswarmed up or whilst driving, checkthe system by an Authorised KiaDealer or other competent repairshop as soon as possible.

Fuel filter warninglight (Diesel engine)

This warning light illuminates for 3seconds after the ignition switch isset to the ON position and then it willgo out. If it lights up whilst the engineis running, it indicates that water hasaccumulated inside the fuel filter. Ifthis happens, remove the water fromthe fuel filter. For more information,refer to “Fuel filter” in chapter 7.

CAUTIONWhen the fuel filter warninglight is illuminated, enginepower (vehicle speed & idlespeed) may decrease. If youkeep driving with the warninglight on, you can damage yourvehicle's engine parts and injec-tion system of the CommonRail. If this occurs, have yourvehicle checked by an autho-rised KIA dealer as soon as pos-sible.

EPS

4 43

Driving your vehicleDriving your vehicle

Trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gaugethat displays information related todriving, such as estimated distanceto empty, average speed and drivingtime on the LCD.If you press the ▼/OFF button forless than 1second, the light of theLCD will turn off. If you press the▼/OFF button again, the lights of theLCD will turn on.

ModePress the MODE button less than 1second to as follows;

Calendar and Clock (if equipped)Type A - without navigationThe Calendar includes the day,month, year and the clock. The day,month and year shows only in thecalendar mode. The clock is dis-played in every mode.

TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED)

OED046020

Calendar (if equipped)

Elapsed time

Average fuel consumption

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Distance to empty

Average vehicle speed

OED046021


444

Calendar setup modeIf you press the MODE button formore than 2 seconds whilst in thecalendar mode, you will enter thecalendar setup mode. The order ofthe setup is YEAR➝ MONTH➝ DAY.To go to the next setting press theMODE button less than 1second andset the data using the UP(▲) andDOWN(▼) button whilst the selectedsetting blinks.

Clock setup modeIf you press the MODE button formore than 2 seconds whilst in othermodes, you will enter the clock setupmode. The order of the setup isHOUR➝ MINUTE.To go to the next setting press theMODE button less than 1second andset the data using the UP(▲) andDOWN(▼) button whilst the selectedsetting blinks.When the minute digit is lower than30 and the RESET button is pressedless than 1 second, the minute digitwill change to :00 whilst the hourdigit does not change.When the minute digit is over 30 andthe RESET button is pressed lessthan 1 second, the minute digit willchange to :00 whilst the hour digitincreases 1 hour.

Type B - with navigationThe calendar mode is displayed inevery mode.To enter the calendar and clock setup mode whilst in other modes,press the MODE button for morethan 2 seconds. The order of thesetup isHOUR➝MINUTE➝YEAR➝MONTH➝ DAY.To go to the next setting press theMODE button less than 1 secondand set the data using the UP(▲)and DOWN(▼) button whilst theselected setting blinks.

OED046022

4 45


When the minute digit is lower than30 and the RESET button is pressedless than 1 second, the minute digitwill change to 0 whilst the hour digitdoes not change.When the minute digit is over 30 andthe RESET button is pressed lessthan 1 second, the minute digit willchange to 0 whilst the hour digitincreases 1 hour.

Elapsed Time This mode indicates the total timetraveled since the last elapsed timereset.To reset the elapsed time to 0:00,press the RESET button for morethan 1 second, when the elapsedtime is displayed.When it reaches 99:59, the time willstart all over from 0:00.The display ranges from 0:00 to99:59.

Average Fuel Consumption This mode calculates the averagefuel consumption from the total fuelused and the distance since the lastaverage fuel consumption reset. Thefuel used is calculated from the fuelconsumption input. For an accuratecalculation, drive more than 500 m(0.3 miles).To reset the average fuel consump-tion to 0.0 l /100 km (MPG), press theRESET button for more than 1 sec-ond, when average fuel consumptionis displayed.

OED046023 OED046024


464

To change the average fuel con-sumption display unit (l /100km ↔MPG), press the UP(▲) button formore than 3 seconds.The display ranges from 0.0 to 99.9 l/100 km (MPG).

Instantaneous FuelConsumption This mode calculates the instanta-neous fuel consumption from theinstantaneous fuel used and the dis-tance starting from ignition on. Theinstantaneous fuel consumption iscalculated from the fuel consumptioninput. The display is updated everysecond.To reset the instantaneous fuel con-sumption, press the RESET buttonfor more than 1 second, when theinstantaneous fuel consumption isdisplayed.

To change the instantaneous fuelconsumption display unit (l /100km↔ MPG), press the UP(▲) button formore than 3 seconds.The display ranges from 0.0 to 99.9 l/100 km (0.0 to 99.9 MPG).When you drive less than 30 km/h, “--” symbol will be displayed.

OED046025

4 47

Driving your vehicleDriving your vehicle

Distance to Empty This mode indicates the estimateddistance to empty based on the cur-rent fuel in the fuel tank. When theremaining distance is below 50 km(30 miles), a blinking "---" symbol willbe displayed next to the distance toempty indicator.To change the distance to empty dis-play unit (km ↔ miles), press theUP(▲) button for more than 3 sec-onds.The display ranges from 0 to 1500 km(0 to 1500 miles).

✽✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has beeninterrupted, the “DISTANCE TOEMPTY” function may not oper-ate correctly.The trip computer may not regis-ter additional fuel if less than 6litres of fuel are added to the vehi-cle.

• Trip computer provides a driverwith supplemental informationabout the current operating statusof your vehicle. So the estimateddistance to empty can be changedaccording to operating status ofyour vehicle, average fuel con-sumption and previously drivingstyle. Therefore the valuesapproved or displayed on LCD forthe first time can be different withyour vehicle’s.

• The figure of distance to empty isestimated driving distance, so itcan be different from the drivingdistance really is.

Average Vehicle Speed This mode calculates the averagespeed of the vehicle since the lastaverage speed reset.To reset the average vehicle speed,press the RESET button for morethan 1 second, when the averagevehicle speed is displayed.To change the instantaneous fuelconsumption display unit (km/h ↔MPH), press the UP(▲) button formore than 3 seconds.The display ranges from 0 to 260kph(160mph)

OED046073OED046072


484

Outside Ambient Temperature The monitor will display the currentoutside ambient temperature.To change the outside ambient tem-perature display unit (°C ↔ °F),press the DOWN(▼) button for morethan 3 seconds. But the temperatureunit does not change when the tripcomputer is in the calendar mode.The display ranges from -40°C to+80°C (-40°F to 176°F)

• Between -5°C and 3°C/23°F and37°F(Freezing range), 'Ice on road'segment is active.

• Freezing segment will turn on afterthe outside ambient temperaturedisplay flashes 5 times when intransition from the non-freezerange to freeze range.

Door and Rear Hatch OpenDisplayThe trip computer will display thecorresponding door or rear hatchthat is not closed securely.

INFORMATION MONITOR (IF EQUIPPED)

OED046074 OED046075

4 49


TPMS (if equipped)The monitor will display the corre-sponding tyre that is low with pres-sure.For details, see Tyre PressureMonitoring System on chapter 6.

Stop Lamp Fail Display (if equipped)The monitor will display the corre-sponding stop light that has malfunc-tioned.

OED046077OED046076


504

The back warning system assists thedriver during backward movement ofthe vehicle by chiming if any object issensed within a distance of 120 cm(47 in.) behind the vehicle. This sys-tem is a supplemental system and itis not intended to nor does it replacethe need for extreme care and atten-tion of the driver. The sensing rangeand objects detectable by the backsensors are limited. Whenever back-ing-up, pay as much attention towhat is behind you as you would in avehicle without a back warning sys-tem.

Operation of the back warningsystemOperating condition• This system will activate when back-

ing up with the ignition switch ON.If the vehicle is moving at a speedover 5 km/h (3 mph), the systemmay not be activated correctly.

• The sensing distance whilst theBack Warning System is in opera-tion is approximately 120 cm (47in.).

• When more than two objects aresensed at the same time, the clos-est one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm

(47 in. to 32 in.) from the rearbumper: Buzzer beeps intermit-tently

• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm(31 in. to 16 in.) from the rearbumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-quently

• When an object is within 40 cm (15in.) of the rear bumper:Buzzer sounds continuously.

BACK WARNING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OED046092

WARNING The Back Warning System is asupplementary function only.The operation of the BackWarning System can be affectedby several factors (includingenvironmental conditions). It isthe responsibility of the driverto always check the area behindthe vehicle before and whilstbacking up.

4 51


Non-operational conditions ofback warning systemThe back warning system may notoperate properly when:1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It

will operate normally when themoisture has been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreignmatter, such as snow or water, orthe sensor cover is blocked. (It willoperate normally when the materi-al is removed or the sensor is nolonger blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,gradient).

4. Objects generating excessivenoise (vehicle horns, loud motor-cycle engines, or truck air brakes)are within range of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.6. Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are within range of thesensor.

7. The sensor is covered with snow.8. Trailer towing

The detecting range may decreasewhen:1. The sensor is stained with foreign

matter such as snow or water.(The sensing range will return tonormal when removed.)

2. Outside air temperature isextremely hot or cold.

The following objects may not berecognized by the sensor:1. Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles.2. Objects which tend to absorb the

sensor frequency such as clothes,spongy material or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than1 m (40 in.) and narrower than 14cm (6 in.) in diameter.

Back warning system precau-tions• The back warning may not sound

sequentially depending on thespeed and shapes of the objectsdetected.

• The back warning system maymalfunction if the vehicle bumperheight or sensor installation hasbeen modified or damaged. Anynon-factory installed equipment oraccessories may also interfere withthe sensor performance.

• The sensor may not recognizeobjects less than 40 cm (15 in.)from the sensor, or it may sense anincorrect distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen orstained with snow, dirt, or water,the sensor may be inoperative untilthe stains are removed using a softcloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike thesensor. Sensor damage couldoccur.


524

✽✽ NOTICEThis system can only sense objectswithin the range and location of thesensors; It can not detect objects inother areas where sensors are notinstalled. Also, small or slim objects,such as poles or objects locatedbetween sensors may not be detectedby the sensors.Always visually check behind thevehicle when backing up.Be sure to inform any drivers of thevehicle that may be unfamiliar withthe system regarding the systemscapabilities and limitations.

Self-diagnosisIf you don’t hear an audible warningsound or if the buzzer sounds inter-mittently when shifting the gear tothe R (Reverse) position, this mayindicate a malfunction in the backwarning system. If this occurs, haveyour vehicle checked by an autho-rised KIA dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING Pay close attention when thevehicle is driven close toobjects on the road, particularlypedestrians, and especially chil-dren. Be aware that someobjects may not be detected bythe sensors, due to the object’sdistance, size or material, all ofwhich can limit the effective-ness of the sensor. Always per-form a visual inspection tomake sure the vehicle is clear ofall obstructions before movingthe vehicle in any direction.

WARNING Your new vehicle warranty doesnot cover any accidents or dam-age to the vehicle or its occu-pants due to a back warningsystem malfunction. Alwaysdrive safely and cautiously.

4 53


Battery saver function • The purpose of this feature is to

prevent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the parking light when thedriver removes the ignition key andopens the driver- side door.

• With this feature, the parking lightwill be turned off automatically ifthe driver parks on the side of roadat night.

If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed,turn the parking lights OFF and ONagain using the light switch on thesteering column.

Headlight escort function(if equipped)The headlights remain on for approx-imately 5 minutes after the ignitionkey is removed or turned to the ACCor LOCK position. However, if the dri-ver’s door is opened and closed, theheadlights are turned off after 30seconds.The headlights can be turned off bypressing the lock button on the trans-mitter twice or turning off the lightswitch from the headlight or Autolight position.

Lighting control The light switch has a Headlight anda Parking light position.To operate the lights, turn the knob atthe end of the control lever to one ofthe following positions:(1) OFF position(2) Parking light position(3) Headlight position(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

LIGHTING

OED046027R


544

Parking light position ( )When the light switch is in the park-ing light position (1st position), thetail, position, license and instrumentpanel lights are ON.

Headlight position ( )When the light switch is in the head-light position (2nd position) the head,tail, position, license and instrumentpanel lights are ON.

✽✽ NOTICEThe ignition switch must be in theON position to turn on the head-lights.

Auto light position (if equipped)When the light switch is in the AUTOlight position, the taillights and head-lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-matically depending on the amountof light outside the vehicle.

OED046028R OED046029R OED046030R

4 55


High - beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull itback for low beams.The high-beam indicator will lightwhen the headlight high beams areswitched on.To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the lightson for a prolonged time whilst theengine is not running.

Flashing headlights To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the nor-mal (low-beam) position whenreleased. The headlight switch doesnot need to be on to use this flashingfeature.

CAUTION• Never place anything over

sensor (1) located on theinstrument panel, this willensure better auto-light sys-tem control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using awindow cleaner, the cleansermay leave a light film whichcould interfere with sensoroperation.

• If your vehicle has window tintor other types of coating onthe front windscreen, the Autolight system may not workproperly.



564

Turn signals (A)The ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn onthe turn signals, move the lever up ordown. Green arrow indicators on theinstrument panel indicate which turnsignal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. Ifthe indicator continues to flash aftera turn, manually return the lever tothe OFF position.

Lane change signals (B)To signal a lane change, move theturn signal lever slightly and hold it inposition. The lever will return to theOFF position when released.If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, oneof the turn signal bulbs may beburned out and will require replace-ment.

✽✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormallyquick or slow, bulb may be burnedout or have a poor electrical con-nection in the circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped) Fog lights are used to provideimproved visibility and avoid acci-dents when visibility is poor due tofog, rain or snow etc. The fog lightswill turn on when the fog light switch(1) is turned to the ON (2) positionafter the parking light is turned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn theswitch to the ON (2) position again.

OED046033R OED046035R

4 57


Rear fog light (if equipped) To turn the rear fog lights on, turn theheadlight switch to the headlight onposition and turn the rear fog lightswitch (light on cluster will illuminate)to the ON position.The rear fog lights turn on when therear fog switch is turned on after thefront fog switch is turned ON and theheadlight switch to the parking lightposition (if equipped).To turn the rear fog lights off, turn therear fog light switch to the ON posi-tion again or turn the headlightswitch off.

Daytime running light (if equipped)Daytime Running Lights (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, and it is especial-ly helpful after dawn and before sun-set.The DRL system will make your low-beam headlights turn OFF when:1. The headlight switch is ON.2. The parking light switch is ON.3. Engine stops.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you want the DRL off, open thedriver’s side fuse panel cover andinsert any spare fuse into the DRLOFF position.

OED046034R

CAUTIONWhen in operation, the foglights consume large amountsof vehicle electrical power. Onlyuse the fog lights when visibilityis poor or unnecessary batteryand generator drain couldoccur.


584

Headlight leveling device (if equipped)To adjust the headlight beam levelaccording to the number of the pas-sengers and the loading weight inthe luggage area, turn the beam lev-eling switch.The higher the number of the switchposition, the lower the headlightbeam level. Always keep the head-light beam at the proper levelingposition, or headlights may dazzleother road users.

Listed below are the examples ofproper switch settings. For loadingconditions other than those listedbelow, adjust the switch position sothat the beam level may be the near-est as the condition obtained accord-ing to the list.

OED046036R

Loading condition

Driver only

Driver + Front passenger

Full passengers

(including driver)

Full passengers (including

driver) + Maximum per-

missible loading

Driver + Maximum per-

missible loading

Switch position

0

0

1

2

3

4 59


Windscreen wipers Type AOperates as follows when the igni-tion switch is turned ON.0 : Wiper is not in operationINT : Wiper operates intermittently

at the same wiping intervals.Use this mode in a light rain ormist. To vary the speed set-ting, turn the speed controlknob (1).

1 : Normal wiper speed2 : Fast wiper speed

: For a single wiping cycle, pushthe lever downward and releaseit with the lever in the 0 position.The wipers will operate continu-ously if the lever is pusheddownward and held.

✽✽ NOTICEIf there is heavy accumulation ofsnow or ice on the windscreen,defrost the windscreen for about 10minutes, or until the snow and/or iceis removed before using the wind-screen wipers to ensure proper oper-ation.

Type BOperates as follows when the igni-tion switch is turned ON.0/1/2/ :See the explanation for type A oper-ation.

AUTO (if equipped) :The rain sensor located on the upperend of windscreen glass senses theamount of rainfall and controls thewiping cycle for the proper intervals.The more it rains, the faster the wiperoperates. When the rain stops, thewiper stops. To vary the speed set-ting, turn the speed control knob (1).If the ignition switch is turned ONwhen the wiper switch is set in AUTOmode, or wiper switch is set in AUTOmode when the ignition switch is ON,wiper will operate once to perform aself-check of the system. Set thewiper to OFF position when the wiperis not in use.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OED046037R


604

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage

to the wipers or windscreen,do not operate the wiperswhen the windscreen is dry.

• To prevent damage to thewiper blades, do not usepetrol, kerosene, paint thinner,or other solvents on or nearthem.

• To prevent damage to thewiper arms and other compo-nents, do not attempt to movethe wipers manually.

CAUTIONWhen washing the vehicle, setthe wiper switch in the OFFposition to stop the auto wiperoperation.Wiper may operate and be dam-aged if the switch is set in AUTOmode whilst washing vehicle.Do not remove the sensor coverlocated on the upper end of thepassenger side windscreenglass. Damage to system partscould occur and may not be cov-ered by you vehicle warranty.When the starting the vehicle inwinter, set the wiper switch inthe OFF position. Otherwise,wipers may operate and ice maydamage the windscreen wiperblades. Always remove all snowand ice and defrost the wind-screen properly prior to operat-ing the windscreen wipers.

WARNING When the ignition switch is ONand the windscreen wiperswitch is placed in the AUTOmode, use caution in the follow-ing situations to avoid anyinjury to the hands or otherparts of the body:• Do not touch the upper end of

the windscreen glass facingthe rain sensor.

• Do not wipe the upper end ofthe windscreen glass with adamp or wet cloth.

• Do not put pressure on thewindscreen glass.

4 61


Windscreen washers In the OFF position, pull the levergently toward you to spray washerfluid on the windscreen and to runthe wipers 2-3 cycles.Use this function when the wind-screen is dirty.The spray and wiper operation willcontinue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, checkthe washer fluid level. If the fluid levelis not sufficient, you will need to addappropriate non-abrasive wind-screen washer fluid to the washerreservoir.The reservoir filler neck is located inthe front of the engine compartmenton the passenger side.

Rear window wiper and wash-er switch (if equipped)The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of thewiper and washer switch lever. Turnthe switch to desired position tooperate the rear wiper and washer.

- Spraying washer fluid and wip-ing

- Normal wiper operationo - Wiper is not in operation

- Spraying washer fluid and wip-ing

OED046040RCAUTION

To prevent possible damage tothe washer pump, do not oper-ate the washer when the fluidreservoir is empty.

OED046041R

WARNINGDo not use the washer in freez-ing temperatures without firstwarming the windscreen withthe defrosters; the washer solu-tion could freeze on contactwith the windscreen andobscure your vision.


624

✽✽ NOTICEIf you want to defrost and defog onthe front windscreen, refer to“Windscreen Defrosting andDefogging” in this section.

Rear window defrosterThe defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice fromthe interior and exterior of the rearwindow, whilst engine is running.

To activate the rear windowdefroster, press the rear windowdefroster button. The indicator on therear window defroster button illumi-nates when the defroster is ON.If there is heavy accumulation ofsnow on the rear window, brush it offbefore operating the rear defroster.The rear window defroster automati-cally turns off after approximately 20minutes or when the ignition switch isturned off. To turn off the defroster,press the rear window defroster but-ton again.

Outside mirror defroster (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with out-side mirror defrosters, they will oper-ate at the same time when you turnon the rear window defroster.

DEFROSTER

OED046043

OED046044

Type A

Type B

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the con-ductors bonded to the insidesurface of the rear window,never use sharp instruments orwindow cleaners containingabrasives to clean the window.

4 63


Front windscreen deicer (if equipped)The engine must be running toenable this feature. To activate thefront windscreen deicer, press thefront windscreen deicer button. Theindicator on the button illuminateswhen the deicer is ON. The frontwindscreen deicer automaticallyturns off after 20 minutes or whenthe ignition switch is turned off. Toturn off the deicer, press the frontwindscreen deicer button again.

The hazard warning flasher shouldbe used whenever you find it neces-sary to stop the car in a hazardouslocation. When you must make suchan emergency stop, always pull offthe road as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turnedon by pushing in the hazard switch.This causes all turn signal lights toblink. The hazard warning lights willoperate even though the key is not inthe ignition switch.To turn the hazard warning lights off,push the switch a second time.


HAZARD WARNING FLASHER


644

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Temperature control knob

2. Mode selection knob

3. Fan speed control knob

4. Air conditioning button (if equipped)

5. Air intake control button

6. Rear window defroster button

OED046046

4 65


Fan speed control knob The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed control knob allowsyou to control the fan speed of the airflowing from the ventilation system.To change the fan speed, turn theknob to the right for higher speed orleft for lower speed.Setting the fan speed control knob tothe “OFF” position turns off the fan.

Temperature control knobThe temperature control knob allowsyou to control the temperature of theair flowing from the ventilation sys-tem.To change the air temperature inthe passenger compartment turn theknob to the right for warm and hot airor left for cooler air.

Mode selection knob The mode selection knob controlsthe direction of the air flow throughthe ventilation system.

OED046047 OED046048 OED046049


664

MAX/ A/C position When you select the MAXA/C mode whilst the fanspeed is on, the followingsystem settings will bemade automatically;• the air conditioning sys-

tem will be turned on.• the recirculated air posi-

tion will be selected.• the face mode will be

selected.If you select MAX A/Cmode, you will not be ableto cancel the A/C systemoperation, or change therecirculated air mode posi-tion.Set the fan speed controlknob to the desired speedand rotate the tempera-ture control knob to theextreme left position formaximum cooling.(outlet port: B, D)OED046050R

MAXA/C

4 67


Face position Air flow is directed towardthe upper body and face.Additionally, each outletcan be controlled to directthe air discharged fromthe outlet.(outlet port: B, D)

Face - floor position Air flow is directedtowards the face and thefloor. The air to the floor iswarmer than the air to theface (except when thetemperature control is setto the extreme cold posi-tion).(outlet port: B, D, C, E)

Floor position Most of the air flow isdirected to the floor, with asmall amount of the airbeing directed to the wind-screen and side windowdefroster.(outlet port: C, E, A, D)

Floor - defrost position Most of the air flow isdirected to the floor andthe windscreen with asmall amount directed tothe side windowdefrosters.(outlet port: A, C, E, D)

Defrost position Most of the air flow isdirected to the windscreenwith a small amount of airdirected to the side win-dow defrosters.(outlet port: A, D)

Instrument panel ventsThe outlet vents (B, D) can beopened or closed separately usingthe horizontal thumbwheel. To closethe vent, rotate it left to the maximumposition. To open the vent, rotate itright to the desired position.Also, you can adjust the direction ofair delivery from these vents usingthe vent control lever as shown.

OED046051R


684

Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh)air position or recirculated air posi-tion.To change the air intake control posi-tion, push the control button.

Recirculated air position The indicator light on thebutton is illuminated whenthe recirculated air posi-tion is selected.With the recirculated airposition selected, air frompassenger compartmentwill be drawn through theheating system and heat-ed or cooled according tothe function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position The indicator light on thebutton is not illuminatedwhen the outside (fresh)air position is selected.With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, airenters the vehicle fromoutside and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

OED046052

4 69


✽✽ NOTICEIt should be noted that prolongedoperation of the heating in recircu-lated air position will cause foggingof the windscreen and side windowsand the air within the passengercompartment will become stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the “recirculatedair position” selected, will result inexcessively dry air in the passengercompartment.

Air conditioning button (if equipped) Push the A/C button to turn the airconditioning system on (indicatorlight will illuminate). Push the buttonagain to turn the air conditioning sys-tem off.

WARNING• Continued climate control

system operation in the recir-culated air position may allowhumidity to increase insidevehicle which may fog theglass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle withair conditioning or heatingsystem on. It may cause seri-ous harm or death due to adrop in the oxygen leveland/or body temperature.

• Continued climate controlsystem operation in the recir-culated air position can causedrowsiness or sleepiness, andloss of vehicle control. Set theair intake control to the out-side (fresh) air position asmuch as possible whilst driv-ing.

OED046053


704

System operationVentilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windscreen fogs up, set themode to the , position.

Air conditioning (if equipped) All Kia Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant which is not dam-aging to the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Push the air con-

ditioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the

outside air or recirculated air posi-tion.

4. Adjust the fan speed control andtemperature control to maintainmaximum comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired,set the temperature control to theextreme left position, set the airintake control to the recirculated airposition, then set the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

4 71


✽✽ NOTICE• When using the air conditioning

system, monitor the temperaturegauge closely whilst driving uphills or in heavy traffic when out-side temperatures are high. Airconditioning system operationmay cause engine overheating.Continue to use the blower fan butturn the air conditioning systemoff if the temperature gauge indi-cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows inhumid weather air conditioningmay create water droplets insidethe vehicle. Since excessive waterdroplets may cause damage toelectrical equipment, air condi-tioning should only be run withthe windows closed.

Air conditioning system oper-ation tips • If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,open the windows for a short timeto let the hot air inside the vehicleescape.

• To help reduce moisture inside ofwindows on rainy humid days,decrease the humidity inside thevehicle by operating the air condi-tioning system.

• During air conditioning systemoperation, you may occasionallynotice a slight change in enginespeed at idle as the air condition-ing compressor cycles on. This isa normal system operation charac-teristics.

• Use the air conditioning systemevery month if only for a few min-utes to ensure maximum systemperformance.

• When using the air conditioningsystem, you may notice clear waterdripping (or even pudding) on theground under the passenger sideof the vehicle. This is a normal sys-tem operation characteristics.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-tem in the recirculated air positiondoes provide maximum cooling,however, continual operation in thismode may cause the air inside thevehicle to become stale.


724

Checking the amount of airconditioner refrigerant andcompressor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant islow, the performance of the air con-ditioning is reduced. Overfilling alsohas a bad influence on the air condi-tioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected byan authorised Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the performance of the airconditioning system is reduced it isimportant that the correct type andamount of oil and refrigerant isused. Otherwise, damage to thecompressor and abnormal systemoperation may occur.

WARNING The air conditioning systemshould be serviced by an autho-rised Kia dealer. Improper serv-ice may cause serious injury.

4 73


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OED046054

1. Temperature control knob2. AUTO (automatic control) button3. A/C display4. Fan speed control knob5. Air conditioning button

6. Air intake control button / Air quality control system button (if equipped)

7. Front windscreen maximum defrost button8. Mode selection button9. OFF button10. Rear window defroster button


744

Automatic operationThe automatic climate control sys-tem is controlled by simply settingthe desired temperature.The Full Automatic TemperatureControl (FATC) system automaticallycontrols the heating and cooling sys-tem as follows;

1. Push the AUTO button. It is indi-cated by AUTO on the display. Themodes, fan speeds, air intake andair-conditioning will be controlledautomatically by temperature set-ting.

2. Turn the TEMP knob to set thedesired temperature.If the temperature is set to thelowest setting Lo, the air condi-tioning system will operate con-tinuously.

3. To turn the automatic operationoff, press any button except tem-perature control button and AQSbutton. If you press the modeselection button, air-conditioningbutton, defrost button, air intakecontrol button or fan speed button,the selected function will be con-trolled manually whilst other func-tions operate automatically.

Regardless of the temperature set-ting, when using automatic opera-tion, the air conditioning system willautomatically turn on to decrease thehumidity inside the vehicle, even ifthe temperature is set to warm.

✽✽ NOTICENever place anything over the sen-sor located on the instrument panelto ensure better control of the heat-ing and cooling system.

OED046055 OED046078R

4 75


Manual operation The heating and cooling system canbe controlled manually as well bypushing buttons other than the AUTObutton. In this case, the systemworks sequentially according to theorder of buttons selected.When pressing any button exceptAUTO button whilst automatic opera-tion, the functions of the buttons notselected will be controlled automati-cally.Press the AUTO button in order toconvert to full automatic control ofthe system.

Temperature control knobThe temperature will increase to themaximum HI by turning the knob tothe right extremely.The temperature will decrease to theminimum Lo by turning the knob to theleft extremely.When turning the knob, the tempera-ture will increase or decrease by0.5°C/1°F.When set to the lowest tem-perature setting, the air conditioningwill operate continuously.

Temperature conversionIf the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, the temperature modewill reset as Centigrade degree.This is normal condition and you canswitch the temperature modebetween Centigrade to Fahrenheit asfollows;Whilst depressing the OFF button,depress the AUTO button for 3 sec-onds or more. The display willchange from Centigrade toFahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit toCentigrade.

OED046056


764

Fan speed control knobThe fan speed can be set to thedesired speed by turning the fanspeed control knob.The higher the fan speed is, themore air is delivered.Pressing the OFF button turns off thefan.

Air intake control button This is used to select outside (fresh)air position or recirculated air posi-tion.To change the air intake control posi-tion, push the control button.Each time you push the button,intake air position is changed as fol-lows:

Recirculated air positionThe indicator light on thebutton is illuminated whenthe recirculated air posi-tion is selected.With the recirculated airposition selected, air frompassenger compartmentwill be drawn through theheating system and heat-ed or cooled according tothe function selected.OED046058

Recirculated air position

Outside (fresh) air position

AQS mode (if equipped)

OED046057

4 77


Air quality control system(if equipped)The air inflow from outside vehiclecan be automatically controlled.Press the button to activate the airquality control system.When using AQS mode, AQS(AirQuality Control System) automatical-ly senses outdoor air pollutants andminimizes them from entering thevehicle, however, unpleasant or foulodors that might be present may stillbe noticeable within the vehicle.

To deactivate the system;• press the button again.• press the air intake button.• press the AUTO button.• set the mode to the ( ) or ( )

position (when the defogging logicis activated).

• set the temperature control to Lo orHI position whilst automatic opera-tion (the indicator light in the AUTObutton is illuminate).

• Press the OFF button.

CAUTION • Prolonged driving with the

“Air Quality Control System”ON will cause fogging insidethe vehicle.

• To defrost inside the vehicle,press the button or set theair intake button to the outsideposition.

• The air quality control sensoris located at the side of radia-tor, be careful to avoid damag-ing the sensor.

OED046059


784

Outside (fresh) air positionThe indicator light on thebutton is not illuminatedwhen the outside (fresh)air position is selected.With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, airenters the vehicle fromoutside and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

✽✽ NOTICEIt should be noted that prolongedoperation of the heating in recircu-lated air position will cause foggingof the windscreen and side windowsand the air within the passengercompartment will become stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the “recirculatedair position” selected, will result inexcessively dry air in the passengercompartment.

WARNING• Continued climate control

system operation in the recir-culated air position may allowhumidity to increase insidevehicle which may fog theglass and obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle withair conditioning or heatingsystem on. It may cause seri-ous harm or death due to adrop in the oxygen leveland/or body temperature.

• Continued climate controlsystem operation in thereciruclated air position cancause drowsiness or sleepi-ness, and loss of vehicle con-trol. Set the air intake controlto the outside (fresh) air posi-tion as much as possiblewhilst driving.

4 79


Mode selection button The mode selection button controlsthe direction of the air flow throughthe ventilation system.

You can select various modes usingthe face, floor and/or defrost modebutton.If you push the button once, the cor-responding switch will turn on, and ifyou push the button again, the switchwill turn off.

OED046060

OED046050R


804

Face mode Air flow is directed towardthe upper body and face.Additionally, each outletcan be controlled to directthe air discharged from theoutlet. (outlet port: B, D)

Floor mode Most of the air flow isdirected to the floor.(outlet port: C, E, A, D)

Defrost mode Most of the air flow isdirected to the wind-screen.(outlet port: A, D)

Also you may select 2~3 modes atthe same time for desired air flow.- face ( ) + floor ( ) mode- face ( ) + defrost ( ) mode- floor ( ) + defrost ( ) mode- face ( ) + floor ( ) +

defrost ( ) mode

Maximum (MAX) defrost mode When you select the MAX defrostmode, the following system settingswill be made automatically;• the air conditioning system will be

turned on.• the outside(fresh) air position will

be selected.• the fan speed will be set to the high

speed.

If you select the MAX defrost mode,you will not be able to cancel the A/Csystem operation or change the out-side(fresh) air position but you will beable to change the fan speed and thetemperature.To turn the MAX defrost mode off,press the mode button or MAXdefrost button again or AUTO button.

OED046079

4 81


Instrument panel ventsThe outlet vents (B, D) can beopened or closed separately usingthe horizontal thumbwheel. To closethe vent, rotate it left to the maximumposition. To open the vent, rotate itright to the desired position.Also, you can adjust the direction ofair delivery from these vents usingthe vent control lever as shown.

Air conditioning button Push the A/C button to turn the airconditioning system on (indicatorlight will illuminate).Push the button again to turn the airconditioning system off.

OFF buttonPush the OFF button to turn off theair climate control system. Howeveryou can still operate the mode andair intake buttons as long as the igni-tion switch is ON.

OED046061 OED046063OED046051R


824

Air conditioning system oper-ation tips • If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,open the windows for a short timeto let the hot air inside the vehicleescape.

• To help reduce moisture inside ofwindows on rainy humid days,decrease the humidity inside thevehicle by operating the air condi-tioning system.

• During air conditioning systemoperation, you may occasionallynotice a slight change in enginespeed at idle as the air condition-ing compressor cycles on. This isa normal system operation charac-teristics.

• Use the air conditioning systemevery month if only for a few min-utes to ensure maximum systemperformance.

• When using the air conditioningsystem, you may notice clear waterdripping (or even pooling) on theground under the passenger sideof the vehicle. This is a normal sys-tem operation characteristics.

• Operating the air conditioning sys-tem in the recirculated air positiondoes provide maximum cooling,however, continual operation in thismode may cause the air inside thevehicle to become stale.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen using the air conditioning sys-tem, monitor the temperature gaugeclosely whilst driving up hills or inheavy traffic when outside tempera-tures are high. Air conditioning sys-tem operation may cause engineoverheating. Continue to use theblower fan but turn the air condi-tioning system off if the temperaturegauge indicates engine overheating.

4 83


Checking the amount of airconditioner refrigerant andcompressor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant islow, the performance of the air con-ditioning is reduced. Overfilling alsohas a bad influence on the air condi-tioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected byan authorised Kia dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen the performance of the airconditioning system is reduced it isimportant that the correct type andamount of oil and refrigerant isused. Otherwise, damage to thecompressor and abnormal systemoperation may occur.

WARNING The air conditioning systemshould be serviced by an autho-rised Kia dealer. Improper serv-ice may cause serious injury.


844

You can keep beverage cans or otheritems warm or cool using theopen/close lever of the vent installedin the glove box.

1. Turn on the fan control switch.2. Set the air flow control to the face

( ) mode.3. Turn the open/close lever of the

vent installed in the glove box tothe open position.(1) OPEN(2) CLOSE

4. Set the temperature control towarm or cool.

When the cool box is not used, turnthe lever to its closed position.

COOL BOX (IF EQUIPPED)

OED046070R

4 85


Manual climate control systemTo defog inside windscreen 1. Select any fan speed except

“OFF”.2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected.

To defrost outside windscreen 1. Set the fan speed to the right posi-

tion.2. Set the temperature to the

extreme hot position.3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-

ditioning will be selected.

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-perature control to the extremeright/hot position and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desiredwhilst defrosting or defogging, set themode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windscreen, rear window,outside rear view mirrors, and all sidewindows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the bon-net and air inlet in the cowl grill toimprove heater and defroster efficien-cy and to reduce the probability offogging up inside of the windscreen.

CAUTIONDo not use the or posi-tion during cooling operation inextremely humid weather. Thedifference between the tempera-ture of the outside air and thatof the windscreen could causethe outer surface of the wind-screen to fog up, causing lossof visibility. In this case, set themode selection knob to the position and fan speed controlknob to the lower speed.

WINDSCREEN DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

To reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windscreen, the airintake control is set to the outside (fresh) air position automatically if themode is selected to the or position and the air conditioning will auto-matically operate if the mode is selected to the position. If you don't wantthe air conditioning and the outside (fresh) air position, press the correspon-ding button to cancel the operation.

OED046064 OED046065


864

Automatic climate control sys-tem

To defog inside windscreen 1. Select desired fan speed.2. Select desired temperature.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The air-conditioning will be turned

on and outside (fresh) air positionwill be selected.

To defrost outside windscreen 1. Set fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.2. Set temperature to the extreme

hot (HI) position.3. Press the defrost button ( ).4. The air-conditioning will be turned

on and outside (fresh) air positionwill be selected.

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-perature control to the extremeright/hot position and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desiredwhilst defrosting or defogging, set themode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windscreen, rear window,outside rear view mirrors, and all sidewindows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the bon-net and air inlet in the cowl grill toimprove heater and defroster efficien-cy and to reduce the probability offogging up inside of the windscreen.

CAUTIONDo not use the position dur-ing cooling operation inextremely humid weather. Thedifference between the tempera-ture of the outside air and thatof the windscreen could causethe outer surface of the wind-screen to fog up, causing lossof visibility. In this case, set themode selection knob to the position and fan speed controlknob to the lower speed.

To reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windscreen, the airintake control is set to the outside (fresh) air position automatically and theair conditioning will automatically operate if the mode is selected to the position. If you select the mode, you will not be able to cancel the A/Csystem operation or change the outside (fresh) air position.

OED046066 OED046067

4 87


Defogging logicManual climate control systemTo reduce the probability of foggingup the inside of the windscreen, theair intake control is set to the outside(fresh) air position automatically ifany of following occur.• The mode is selected to the or

whilst the system is activated.• The ignition switch is turned on

whilst the mode is selected to theor .

In this case, the air conditioning willautomatically operate if the mode isselected to the .If you don’t want the air-conditioningor outside (fresh) air position, pressthe corresponding button to cancelthe operation.

How to cancel or return defogginglogic of manual climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”

position.2. Turn the mode selection knob to

the defrost position ( ).3. Push the air intake control button

( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-onds.

Then the indicator light in the airintake control button will blink 3 timeswith 0.5 second of interval. It indicatesthat the defogging logic is canceled orreturned to the programmed status.If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, it is reset as the defoglogic status.

Automatic climate control systemTo reduce the probability of foggingup inside of the windscreen, the airintake control is set to outside (fresh)air position automatically if any of fol-lowing occur.• The ignition switch is turned on.• The OFF button is pushed.• The mode is selected to the

position.In this case, the air conditioning willautomatically operate if the mode isselected to the .If you select the mode, you willnot be able to cancel the A/C systemoperation or change the outside(fresh) air position.

OED046068

5

Fuel requirements / 5-2Emission control system / 5-3Before driving / 5-5Suggestions for economical operation / 5-6Special driving conditions / 5-7Trailer towing / 5-16Vehicle weight / 5-25Label information / 5-27

Driving tips

Driving tips

25

FUEL REQUIREMENTSPetrol engine (unleaded)For the optimal vehicle performance,we recommend you to use unleadedpetrol with an octane rating of RON(Research Octane Number) 95 /AKI(Anti Knock Index) 91 or higher.You may use unleaded petrol with anoctane rating of RON 91~94/AKI87~90 but it may result in slight per-formance reduction of the vehicle.

Your new Kia is designed to obtainmaximum performance withUNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-mize exhaust emissions and sparkplug fouling.

✽✽ NOTICENEVER USE LEADED FUEL. Theuse of leaded fuel is detrimental tothe catalytic converter and willdamage the engine control system’soxygen sensor and affect emissioncontrol.Never add any fuel system cleaningagents to the fuel tank other thanwhat Kia has specified. (Consult anAuthorised Kia Dealer for details.)

Petrol engine (Leaded)In countries using LEADED FUEL,your new Kia vehicle must useLEADED FUEL.Your new Kia Vehicleis designed to correspond to LEAD-ED FUEL specifically. Please checkyour vehicle whether your vehiclecan use LEADED FUEL or not.

Petrol containing alcohol andmethanolGasohol, a mixture of petrol andethanol (also known as grain alco-hol), and petrol or gasohol containingmethanol (also known as wood alco-hol) are being marketed along with orinstead of leaded or unleaded petrol.Do not use gasohol containing morethan 10% ethanol, and do not usepetrol or gasohol containing anymethanol. Either of these fuels maycause drivability problems and dam-age to the fuel system.Discontinue using gasohol of anykind if drivability problems occur.

5 3

Driving tips

Vehicle damage or driveability prob-lems may not be covered by themanufacturer’s warranty if they resultfrom the use of:1. Gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol.2. Petrol or gasohol containing

methanol.3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

The emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warrantyinformation contained in theWarranty & Maintenance book inyour vehicle.

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your Kia could affectits performance, safety or durabilityand may even violate governmentalsafety and emissions regulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modifi-cation may not be covered underwarranty.

Engine exhaust gas precau-tions (carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be presentwith other exhaust fumes.Therefore, if you smell exhaustfumes of any kind inside your vehi-cle, have it inspected and repairedimmediately by an authorised Kiadealer. If you ever suspect exhaustfumes are coming into your vehi-cle, drive it only with all the win-dows fully open. Have your vehiclechecked and repaired immediately.

WARNINGEngine exhaust gases containcarbon monoxide (CO). Thoughcolorless and odorless, it isdangerous and could be lethal ifinhaled. Follow the instructionsfollowing to avoid CO poison-ing.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTIONNever use gasohol which con-tains methanol. Discontinue useof any gasohol product whichimpairs drivability.

Driving tips

45

• Do not operate the engine in con-fined or closed areas (such asgarages) any more than what isnecessary to move the vehicle in orout of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a shorttime with the engine running,adjust the ventilation system (asneeded) to draw outside air into thevehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stoppedvehicle for any extended time withthe engine running.

• Inspect the emission control sys-tem whenever engine stalls.

• If the engine stalls or fails to start,do not re-engaging the starter over3 times. If the engine stalls or re-engaged excessively, it may causedamage to the emission controlsystem.

Operating precautions for cat-alytic converters

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-alytic converter emission controldevice.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

petrol engine (unleaded).• Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc-tion, such as misfire or a noticeableloss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse theengine. Examples of misuse arecoasting with the ignition off anddescending steep grades in gearwith the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at highidle speed for extended periods (5minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with anypart of the engine or emission con-trol system. All inspections andadjustments must be made by anauthorised Kia dealer.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyt-ic converter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could voidyour warranties.

WARNING - FireA hot exhaust system can igniteflammable items under yourvehicle. Do not park the vehicleover or near flammable objects,such as dry grass, paper,leaves, etc.

5 5

Driving tips

BEFORE DRIVING Before entering vehicle:• Be sure that all windows, outside

mirror(s), and outside lights areclean.

• Check the condition of the tyres.• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil,engine coolant, brake fluid, andwasher fluid should be checked on aregular basis, with the exact intervaldepending on the fluid. Furtherdetails are provided in Section 7,Maintenance.

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all con-

trols are easily reached.• Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors.• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning

lights when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position.

• Release the parking brake andmake sure the brake warning lightgoes out.

For safe operation, be sure you arefamiliar with your vehicle and itsequipment.

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is danger-ous. Drunk driving is the num-ber one contributor to the high-way death toll each year. Even asmall amount of alcohol willaffect your reflexes, perceptionsand judgement.You are much more likely tohave a serious accident if youdrink and drive.If you are drinking or takingdrugs, don’t drive. Do not ridewith a driver who has beendrinking or taking drugs.Choose a designated driver orcall a cab.Driving whilst under the influ-ence of drugs is as dangerousor more dangerous than drivingdrunk.

Driving tips

65

SUGGESTIONS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATIONYour vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, whereyou drive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects howmany kilometers (miles) you can getfrom a litre (gallon) of fuel.To operateyour vehicle as economically as pos-sible, use the following driving sug-gestions to help save money in bothfuel and repairs:• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling.

Once the engine is runningsmoothly, begin driving.Remember, engine warm-up maytake a little longer on cold days.

• Save fuel by accelerating slowlyafter stopping.

• Keep the engine in tune and followthe recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule. This will increasethe life of all parts and lower youroperating costs.

• Do not use the air conditionerunnecessarily.

• Slow down when driving on roughroads.

• For longer tyre life and better fueleconomy, always keep the tyresinflated to the recommended pres-sures.

• Maintain a safe distance from othervehicles to avoid sudden stops.This will reduce wear on brake lin-ings and pads. Driving in such away will also save fuel becauseextra fuel is required to accelerateback to driving speed.

• Do not carry unnecessary weightin the vehicle.

• Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal whilst driving. This cancause needless wear, possibledamage to the brakes, and poorfuel economy.

• Improper wheel alignment resultsin faster tyre wear and lower fueleconomy.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offsetsome of this loss, slow down whendriving in these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operatingcondition is important both for econ-omy and safety. Therefore, have anauthorised Kia dealer performscheduled inspections and mainte-nance.

WARNING - Engine offduring motion

Never turn the engine off tocoast down hills or anytime thevehicle is in motion. The powersteering and power brakes willnot function without the enginerunning. Instead, keep theengine on and downshift to anappropriate gear for enginebraking effect.

5 7

Driving tips

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditionsare encountered such as water,snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-ards, follow these suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra

distance for braking.• Avoid sudden movements in brak-

ing or steering.• When braking, pump the brake

pedal with a light up-and-downmotion until the vehicle is stopped.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,use second gear. Accelerate slow-ly to avoid spinning the drivewheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, orother non-slip material under thedrive wheels to provide tractionwhen stalled in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicleto free it from snow, sand, or mud,first turn the steering wheel right andleft to clear the area around yourfront wheels. Then, shift back andforth between 1 (First) and R(Reverse) in vehicles equipped witha manual transaxle or R (Reverse)and any forward gear in vehiclesequipped with an automatictransaxle. Do not race the engine,and spin the wheels as little as pos-sible. If you are still stuck after a fewtries, have the vehicle pulled out by atow vehicle to avoid engine overheat-ing and possible damage to thetransaxle.

WARNING - DownshiftingDownshifting with an automatictransaxle, whilst driving on slip-pery surfaces can cause anaccident. The sudden change intyre speed could cause thetyres to skid. Be careful whendownshifting on slippery sur-faces.

CAUTIONProlonged rocking may causeengine over-heating, transaxledamage or failure, and tyre dam-age.

Driving tips

85

✽✽ NOTICEThe ESP system (if equipped) shouldbe turned OFF prior to rocking thevehicle.

Smooth corneringAvoid braking or gear changing incorners, especially when roads arewet. Ideally, corners should alwaysbe taken under gentle acceleration. Ifyou follow these suggestions, tyrewear will be held to a minimum.

Driving at night Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight,here are some important tips toremember:• Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi-cles, as it may be more difficult tosee at night, especially in areaswhere there may not be any streetlights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce theglare from other driver's head-lights.

• Keep your headlights clean andproperly aimed on vehicles notequipped with the automatic head-light aiming feature. Dirty orimproperly aimed headlights willmake it much more difficult to seeat night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-lights of oncoming vehicles. Youcould be temporarily blinded, and itwill take several seconds for youreyes to readjust to the darkness.

WARNING - Spinningtyres

Do not spin the wheels, espe-cially at speeds more than 56km/h (35 mph). Spinning thewheels at high speeds when thevehicle is stationary couldcause a tyre to overheat,explode and injure bystanders.

5 9

Driving tips

Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re notprepared for the slick pavement.Here are a few things to considerwhen driving in the rain:• A heavy rainfall will make it harder

to see and will increase the dis-tance needed to stop your vehicle,so slow down.

• Keep your windscreen wipingequipment in good shape. Replaceyour windscreen wiper bladeswhen they show signs of streakingor missing areas on the wind-screen.

• If your tyres are not in good condi-tion, making a quick stop on wetpavement can cause a skid andpossibly lead to an accident. Besure your tyres are in good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make iteasier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large pud-dles can affect your brakes. If youmust go through puddles, try todrive through them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhilst driving until normal brakingoperation returns.

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is nohigher than the bottom of the wheelhub. Drive through any water slowly.Allow adequate stopping distancebecause brake performance may beaffected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them sev-eral times whilst the vehicle is mov-ing slowly.

Driving tips

105

Highway drivingTyresAdjust the tyre inflation pressures tospecification. Low tyre inflation pres-sures will result in overheating andpossible failure of the tyres.Avoid using worn or damaged tyreswhich may result in reduced tractionor tyre failure.

✽✽ NOTICENever exceed the maximum tyreinflation pressure shown on thetyres.

Fuel, engine coolant and engineoilHigh speed travel consumes morefuel than urban motoring. Do not for-get to check both engine coolant andengine oil.

Drive beltA loose or damaged drive belt mayresult in overheating of the engine.

WARNING • Underinflated or overinflated

tyres can cause poor han-dling, loss of vehicle control,and sudden tyre failure lead-ing to accidents, injuries, andeven death. Always checktyres for proper inflationbefore driving. For proper tyrepressures, refer to “Tyres andwheels” in chapter 8.

• Driving on tyres with no orinsufficient tread is danger-ous. Worn-out tyres can resultin loss of vehicle control, col-lisions, injury, and even death.Worn-out tyres should bereplaced as soon as possibleand should never be used fordriving. Always check the tyretread before driving your car.For further information andtread limits, refer to “Tyresand wheels” in chapter 7.

5 11

Driving tips

Winter driving• We recommend that you carry

emergency equipment, includingtyre chains, a window scraper,windscreen de-icer, a bag of sandor salt, flares, a small shovel andjumper cables.

• Make sure you have sufficient eth-ylene-glycol coolant in the radiator.

• Check the battery condition andcables. Cold temperatures reducethe capacity of any battery, so itmust be in excellent condition toprovide enough winter startingpower.

• Make sure the engine oil viscosityis suitable for cold weather.

• Check the ignition system for looseconnections and damage.

• Use antifreeze-formulated wind-screen washer fluid. (Do not useengine coolant antifreeze.)

• Do not use the parking brake if itmight freeze. When parking, shiftto 1 (First) or R (Reverse) with amanual transaxle or P (Park) withan automatic transaxle and blockthe rear wheels.

Snow tyres If you mount snow tyres on your Kia,make sure they are radial tyres of thesame size and load range as theoriginal tyres. Mount snow tyres onall four wheels to balance your vehi-cle’s handling in all weather condi-tions. Keep in mind that the tractionprovided by snow tyres on dry roadsmay not be as high as your vehicle'soriginal equipment tyres. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tyre dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Driving tips

125

Do not install studded tyres withoutfirst checking local, state and munic-ipal regulations for possible restric-tions against their use.

Tyre chains Since the sidewalls of radial tyres arethinner, they can be damaged bymounting some types of snow chainson them. Therefore, the use of snowtyres is recommended instead ofsnow chains. Do not mount tyrechains on vehicles equipped withaluminum wheels, snow chains maycause damage to the wheels. If snowchains must be used, use wire-typechains with a thickness of less than15 mm (0.59 in). Damage to yourvehicle caused by improper snowchain use is not covered by yourvehicle manufacturers warranty.Install them only on the front tyres.

WARNING - Snow tyresize

Snow tyres should be equiva-lent in size and type to the vehi-cle's standard tyres. Otherwise,the safety and handling of yourvehicle may be adversely affect-ed.

1JBA4068

CAUTION• If your vehicle is equipped

with 225/45R17 tyres, do notuse tyre chains.

• Make sure the snow chainsare the correct size and typefor your tyres. Incorrect snowchains can cause damage tothe vehicle body and suspen-sion and may not be coveredby your vehicle manufacturerwarranty. Also, the snow chainconnecting hooks may bedamaged from contactingvehicle components causingthe snow chains to comeloose from the tyre. Make surethe snow chains are SAEclass “S” certified.

• Always check chain installa-tion for proper mounting afterdriving approximately 0.5 to 1km (0.3 to 0.6 miles) to ensuresafe mounting. Retighten orremount the chains if they areloose.

5 13

Driving tips

Chain installation When installing chains, follow themanufacturer's instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed. Ifyou hear the chains contacting thebody or chassis, stop and tightenthem. If they still make contact, slowdown until it stops. Remove thechains as soon as you begin drivingon cleared roads.

WARNING - Mountingchains

When mounting snow chains,park the vehicle on level groundaway from traffic. Turn on thevehicle Hazard Warning flashersand place a triangular emer-gency warning device behindthe vehicle if available. Alwaysplace the vehicle in park (P),apply the parking brake andturn off the engine beforeinstalling snow chains.

WARNING - Tyre chains• The use of chains may

adversely affect vehicle han-dling.

• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20mph) or the chain manufactur-er’s recommended speedlimit, whichever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoidbumps, holes, sharp turns,and other road hazards, whichmay cause the vehicle tobounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking.

CAUTION• Chains that are the wrong size

or improperly installed candamage your vehicle's brakelines, suspension, body andwheels.

• Stop driving and retighten thechains any time you hear themhitting the vehicle.

Driving tips

145

Use high quality ethylene glycolcoolantYour vehicle is delivered with highquality ethylene glycol coolant in thecooling system. It is the only type ofcoolant that should be used becauseit helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the waterpump and prevents freezing. Be sureto replace or replenish your coolantin accordance with the maintenanceschedule in chapter 7. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assurethat its freezing point is sufficient forthe temperatures anticipated duringthe winter.

Check battery and cablesWinter puts additional burdens onthe battery system. Visually inspectthe battery and cables as describedin chapter 7. The level of charge inyour battery can be checked by anauthorised KIA dealer or a servicestation.

Change to "winter weight" oil ifnecessaryIn some climates it is recommendedthat a lower viscosity "winter weight"oil be used during cold weather. Seechapter 8 for recommendations. Ifyou aren't sure what weight oil youshould use, consult an authorisedKIA dealer.

Check spark plugs and ignitionsystemInspect your spark plugs asdescribed in chapter 7 and replacethem if necessary. Also check allignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn ordamaged in any way.

To keep locks from freezingTo keep the locks from freezing,squirt an approved de-icer fluid orglycerine into the key opening. If alock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to removethe ice. If the lock is frozen internally,you may be able to thaw it out byusing a heated key. Handle the heat-ed key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washeranti-freeze in systemTo keep the water in the windowwasher system from freezing, add anapproved window washer anti-freezesolution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window wash-er anti-freeze is available from anauthorised KIA dealer and most autoparts outlets. Do not use enginecoolant or other types of anti-freezeas these may damage the paint fin-ish.

5 15

Driving tips

Don't let your parking brakefreezeUnder some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engagedposition. This is most likely to hap-pen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near therear brakes or if the brakes are wet.If there is a risk the parking brakemay freeze, apply it only temporarilywhilst you put the gear selector leverin P (automatic transaxle) or in firstor reverse gear (manual transaxle)and block the rear wheels so the carcannot roll. Then release the parkingbrake.

Don't let ice and snow accumu-late underneathUnder some conditions, snow andice can build up under the fendersand interfere with the steering. Whendriving in severe winter conditionswhere this may happen, you shouldperiodically check underneath thecar to be sure the movement of thefront wheels and the steering com-ponents is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipmentDepending on the severity of theweather where you drive your car,you should carry appropriate emer-gency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tyrechains, tow straps or chains, flash-light, emergency flares, sand, ashovel, jumper cables, a windowscraper, gloves, ground cloth, cover-alls, a blanket, etc.

Driving tips

165

TRAILER TOWING (FOR EUROPE)

✽✽ NOTICEPulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by yourwarranty. To pull a trailer correctly,follow the advice in this section.

WARNING - Towing atrailer

If you don't use the correctequipment and drive properly,you can lose control when youpull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakesmay not work well - or even atall. You and your passengerscould be seriously or fatallyinjured. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps inthis section.

Engine

1.4/1.6 2.0 Engine 1.6 2.0 Item Engine M/T A/T Engine EngineMaximum Without brake 550 550 550 550 550trailer System (1212) (1212) (1212) (1212) (1212)weight With brake 1200 1500 1400 1400 1500

kg (Ibs.) System (2645) (3301) (3086) (3086) (3307)Maximum permissiblestatic vertical load on

55 75 75 75 75the coupling device

kg (Ibs.)Recommended distance from rear wheel centre to coupling point 820

mm (Inch)

M/T : Manual transaxleA/T : Automatic transaxle

Petrol Engine Diesel Engine

5 17

Driving tips

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. Toidentify what the vehicle traileringcapacity is for your vehicle, youshould read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section.Remember that trailering is differentthan just driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in han-dling, durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering requirescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.This section contains many time-tested, important trailering tips andsafety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Please read thissection carefully before you pull atrailer.

OED056900

Driving tips

185

Load-pulling components such asthe engine, transaxle, wheel assem-blies, and tyres are forced to workharder against the load of the addedweight. The engine is required tooperate at relatively higher speedsand under greater loads. This addi-tional burden generates extra heat.The trailer also adds considerably towind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements.

If you do decide to pull a trailerHere are some important points ifyou decide to pull a trailer:• Consider using a sway control. You

can ask a towbar hitch dealerabout sway control.

• After your odometer indicates 800km (500 miles) or more, you cantow a trailer. For the first 800 km(500 miles) that you tow a trailer,don’t drive over 80 km/h (50 mph)and don’t make starts at full throt-tle. This helps your engine andother parts of your vehicle “wear” inat the heavier loads.

• Always drive your vehicle less than100 km/h. If your vehicle is a com-ercial vehicle, drive less than 80km/h.

• The important considerations haveto do with weight:

Weight of the trailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be? Itshould never weigh more than themaximum trailer weight with trailerbrakes. But even that can be tooheavy.It depends on how you plan to useyour trailer. For example, speed, alti-tude, road grades, outside tempera-ture and how much your vehicle isused to pull a trailer are all important.The ideal trailer weight can alsodepend on any special equipmentthat you have on your vehicle.

5 19

Driving tips

Weight of the trailer tongueThe nose weight of any trailer is animportant weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossvehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-cle. This weight includes the curbweight of the vehicle, any cargo youmay carry in it, and the people whowill be riding in the vehicle. And if youwill tow a trailer, you must add thenose weight to the GVW becauseyour vehicle will also be carrying thatweight.After you've loaded your trailer,weigh the trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they aren’t, you may beable to correct them simply by mov-ing some items around in the trailer.

Towbar hitches It's important to have the correct tow-bar hitch equipment. Crosswinds,large trucks going by, and roughroads are a few reasons why you’llneed the right towbar hitch. Here aresome rules to follow:• Will you have to make any holes in

the body of your vehicle when youinstall a trailer towbar hitch? If youdo, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the towbarhitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly car-bon monoxide (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle,as well as dirt and water.

• The bumpers on your vehicle arenot intended for towbar hitches. Donot attach rental towbar hitches orother bumper-type towbar hitchesto them. Use only a frame-mountedtowbar hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

WARNING• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in thefront. The front should beloaded with approximately60% of the total trailer load;the rear should be loaded withapproximately 40% of the totaltrailer load.

• Never exceed the maximumweight limits of the trailer ortrailer towing equipment.Improper loading can result indamage to your vehicle and/orpersonal injury. Checkweights and loading at a com-mercial scale or highwaypatrol office equipped withscales.

• An improperly loaded trailercan cause loss of vehicle con-trol.

Driving tips

205

Safety chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trail-er. Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if itbecomes separated from the towbarhitch.Instructions about safety chains maybe provided by the towbar hitch man-ufacturer or by the trailer manufactur-er. Follow the manufacturer’s recom-mendation for attaching safetychains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your trail-er. And, never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer brakes If your trailer weighs more than themaximum trailer weight without trailerbrakes loaded, then it needs its ownbrakes and they must be adequate.Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes soyou’ll be able to install, adjust andmaintain them properly.• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake

system.

Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Before settingout for the open road, you must getto know your trailer. Acquaint your-self with the feel of handling andbraking with the added weight of thetrailer. And always keep in mind thatthe vehicle you are driving is now agood deal longer and not nearly soresponsive as your vehicle is byitself.Before you start, check the trailertowbar hitch and platform, safetychains, electrical connector(s), lights,tyres and mirror adjustment. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start yourvehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controller byhand to be sure the brakes are work-ing. This lets you check your electri-cal connection at the same time.During your trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lights and any trailerbrakes are still working.

WARNINGDo not use a trailer with its ownbrakes unless you are absolute-ly certain that you have properlyset up the brake system. This isnot a task for amateurs. Use anexperienced, competent trailershop for this work.

5 21

Driving tips

Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving your vehicle without a trailer.This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sud-den turns.

Passing You’ll need more passing distanceup ahead when you’re towing a trail-er. And, because you’re a good deallonger, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforeyou can return to your lane.

Backing up Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, just move yourhand to the left. To move the trailer tothe right, move your hand to theright. Always back up slowly and, ifpossible, have someone guide you.

Making turns When you’re turning with a trailer,make wider turns than normal. Dothis so your trailer won’t strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky or sud-den manoeuvres. Signal well inadvance.

Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehiclehas to have a different turn signalflasher and extra wiring. The greenarrows on your instrument panel willflash whenever you signal a turn orlane change. Properly connected,the trailer lights will also flash to alertother drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes, or stop.When towing a trailer, the greenarrows on your instrument panel willflash for turns even if the bulbs onthe trailer are burned out. Thus, youmay think drivers behind you areseeing your signals when, in fact,they are not. It’s important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailerbulbs are still working. You must alsocheck the lights every time you dis-connect and then reconnect thewires.

Driving tips

225

Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-tem directly to your vehicle’s lightingsystem. Use only an approved trailerwiring harness.Your Authorised Kia Dealer canassist you in installing the wiring har-ness.

Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before you start down a long orsteep downgrade. If you don’t shiftdown, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would gethot and no longer operate efficiently.On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce your speed to around 70km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-bility of engine and transaxle over-heating.If your trailer weighs more than themaximum trailer weight without trailerbrakes and you have an automatictransaxle, you should drive in D(Drive) when towing a trailer.Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)when towing a trailer will minimizeheat buildup and extend the life ofyour transaxle.If you have a manual transaxle, drivein fourth gear (or, as you need to, alower gear).

WARNINGFailure to use an approved trail-er wiring harness could result indamage to the vehicle electricalsystem and/or personal injury.

CAUTION• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) payclose attention to the enginecoolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does notoverheat. If the needle of thecoolant temperature gaugemoves across the dial towards“H” (HOT), pull over and stopas soon as it is safe to do so,and allow the engine to idleuntil it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine hascooled sufficiently.

• You must decide drivingspeed depending on trailerweight and uphill grade toreduce the possibility ofengine and transaxle over-heating.

5 23

Driving tips

✽✽ NOTICE - For petrol engine(1.6 or 2.0l) with AutomaticTransaxle

If you tow a trailer on steepgrades(in excess of 12%) at a speedover 30 km/h with the maximumgross vehicle weight and the maxi-mum trailer weight, it can cause theengine or transaxle to overheat.When driving in such conditions,allow the engine to idle until it coolsdown. You may proceed once whenthe engine or transaxle has cooledsufficiently.

Parking on hills Generally, you should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on ahill. People can be seriously or fatal-ly injured, and both your vehicle andthe trailer can be damaged if theybegin a downhill trajectory.

However, if you ever have to parkyour trailer on a hill, here’s how to doit:1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift

into gear.2. Have someone place chocks

under the trailer wheels.3. When the wheel chocks are in

place, release the brakes until thechocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brakes. Apply yourparking brake, and then shift to R(Reverse) for a manual transaxleor P (Park) for an automatictransaxle.

5. Release the brakes.

WARNING - Parking brakeIt can be dangerous to get out ofyour vehicle if the parking brakeis not firmly set.If you have left the engine run-ning, the vehicle can move sud-denly. You or others could beseriously or fatally injured.

WARNING - Parking on ahill

Parking your vehicle on a hillwith a trailer attached couldcause serious injury or death,should the trailer break lose.

Driving tips

245

When you are ready to leave afterparking on a hill 1. With the manual transaxle in

Neutral or automatic transaxle in P(Park), apply your brakes and holdthe brake pedal down whilst you:• Start your engine;• Shift into gear; and• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clearof the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer tow-ing Your vehicle will need service moreoften when you regularly pull a trail-er. Important items to pay particularattention to include engine oil, auto-matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricantand cooling system fluid. Brake con-dition is another important item tofrequently check. Each item is cov-ered in this manual, and the Indexwill help you find them quickly. Ifyou’re trailering, it’s a good idea toreview these sections before youstart your trip.Don’t forget to also maintain yourtrailer and towbar hitch. Follow themaintenance schedule that accom-panied your trailer and check it peri-odically. Preferably, conduct thecheck at the start of each day’s driv-ing. Most importantly, all towbar hitchnuts and bolts should be tight.

CAUTION• Due to higher load during

trailer usage, overheatingmight occur in hot days orduring uphill driving. If thecoolant gauge indicates over-heating, switch off the A/C andstop the vehicle in a safe areato cool down the engine.

• When towing check transaxlefluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equippedwith the air conditioner, youshould install a condenser fanto improve engine perform-ance when towing a trailer.

5 25

Driving tips

VEHICLE WEIGHTThis section will guide you in theproper loading of your vehicle and/ortrailer, to keep your loaded vehicleweight within its design rating capa-bility, with or without a trailer.Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehi-cle design performance. Before load-ing your vehicle, familiarize yourselfwith the following terms for determin-ing your vehicle's weight ratings, withor without a trailer, from the vehicle'sspecifications and the certificationlabel:

Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicleincluding a full tank of fuel and allstandard equipment. It does notinclude passengers, cargo, or option-al equipment.

Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from yourdealer plus any aftermarket equip-ment.

Cargo weightThis figure includes all weight addedto the Base Curb Weight, includingcargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross axle weight)This is the total weight placed oneach axle (front and rear) - includingvehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rat-ing)This is the maximum allowableweight that can be carried by a singleaxle (front or rear). These numbersare shown on the certification label.The total load on each axle mustnever exceed its GAWR.

Driving tips

265

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)This is the Base Curb Weight plusactual Cargo Weight plus passen-gers.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weightrating)This is the maximum allowableweight of the fully loaded vehicle(including all options, equipment,passengers and cargo). The GVWRis shown on the certification labellocated on the driver’s (or front pas-senger’s) door sill.

Overloading

WARNING The gross axle weight rating(GAWR) and the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) for yourvehicle are on the manufactur-er's label attached to the dri-ver's door. Exceeding these rat-ings can cause an accident orvehicle damage. You can calcu-late the weight of your load byweighing the items (or people)before putting them in the vehi-cle. Be careful not to overloadyour vehicle.

5 27

Driving tips

LABEL INFORMATION There are several important labelsand identification numbers locatedon your vehicle. The label locationsare identified in the illustrationsshown.

Vehicle identification number(VIN)

OED056001R OED056003R

OED056004R

OED056005R

Frame number VIN (if equipped)

Compliance label (if equipped)

VIN bar code (if equipped)

Identification label (if equipped)

Type A

OED056002/OED056002R

Type B

Driving tips

285

Tyre specification / pressurelabel

OED056006R

6

Road warning / 6-2In case of an emergency whilst driving / 6-3If the engine will not start / 6-4Emergency starting / 6-5Overheating / 6-8Electrical circuit protection / 6-9Towing / 6-16Tyre pressure monitoring system / 6-21If you have a flat tyre / 6-25



26

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher servesas a warning to other drivers to exer-cise extreme caution whenapproaching, overtaking, or passingyour vehicle. It should be used when-ever emergency repairs are beingmade or when the vehicle is stoppednear the edge of a roadway.Depress the flasher switch with theignition switch in any position. Theflasher switch is located in the centreconsole switch panel. All turn signallights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-ates whether your vehicle is run-ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work whenthe hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when usingthe hazard warning flasher whilstthe vehicle is being towed.

OED046045R

6 3


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILST DRIVINGIf you have a flat tyre whilstdrivingIf a tyre goes flat whilst you are driv-ing:1. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the car slow downwhilst driving straight ahead. Donot apply the brakes immediatelyor attempt to pull off the road asthis may cause a loss of control.When the car has slowed to sucha speed that it is safe to do so,brake carefully and pull off theroad. Drive off the road as far aspossible and park on firm, levelground. If you are on a dividedhighway, do not park in the medianarea between the two traffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn onyour emergency hazard flashers,set the parking brake and put thetransaxle in P (automatictransaxle) or reverse (manualtransaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of thecar. Be sure they all get out on theside of the car that is away fromtraffic.

4. When changing a flat tyre, followthe instruction provided later inthis section.

If engine stalls whilst driving1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If

your vehicle will not start, contactan authorised KIA dealer or seekother qualified assistance.


46

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT STARTIf engine doesn't turn over orturns over slowly1. If your car has an automatic

transaxle, be sure the gear selec-tor lever is in N (Neutral) or P(Park) and the parking brake isset.

2. Check the battery connections tobe sure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the lightdims or goes out when you oper-ate the starter, the battery is dis-charged.

4. Check the starter connections tobe sure they are securely tight-ened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle tostart it. See instructions for “Jumpstarting”.

If engine turns over normallybut does not start1. Check fuel level.2. With the ignition switch in the

LOCK position, check all connec-tors at ignition, coil and sparkplugs (if equipped). Reconnectany that may be disconnected orloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the enginecompartment.

4. If the engine still does not start,call an authorised KIA dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

WARNING If the engine will not start, donot push or pull the car to startit.This could result in a collisionor cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting maycause the catalytic converter tobe overloaded and create a firehazard.

6 5


EMERGENCY STARTING Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous ifdone incorrectly. Therefore, to avoidharm to yourself or damage to yourvehicle or battery, follow the jumpstarting procedures listed on page6-6. If in doubt, we strongly recom-mend that you have a competenttechnician or towing service jumpstart your vehicle.

✽✽ NOTICEUse only a 12-volt jumper system.You can damage a 12-volt startingmotor, ignition system, and otherelectrical parts beyond repair by useof a 24-volt power supply (either two12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery• Keep all flames or sparks

away from the battery.The bat-tery produces hydrogen gaswhich may explode if exposedto flame or sparks.

• Do not attempt to jump startthe vehicle if the dischargedbattery is frozen or if the elec-trolyte level is low; the batterymay rupture or explode.

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery asthis may cause the battery torupture or explode causing seri-ous injury.


66

Connecting jumper cables Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is

12-volt and that its negative termi-nal is grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehiclesto touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in theexact sequence shown in the pre-vious illustration. First connect oneend of a jumper cable to the posi-tive terminal of the discharged bat-tery (1), then connect the otherend to the positive terminal on thebooster battery (2).

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Discharged battery

Jumper Cables

Booster battery

OED066001

* The engine lifting bracket position may differ from the illustration according to the engine type.

6 7


5. Proceed to connect one end of theother jumper cable to the negativeterminal of the booster battery (3),then the other end to a solid, sta-tionary, metallic point (for exam-ple, the engine lifting bracket)away from the battery (4). Do notconnect it to or near any part thatmoves when the engine iscranked. Do not connect thejumper cable from the negativeterminal of the booster battery tothe negative terminal of the dis-charged battery.Do not allow the jumper cables tocontact anything except the cor-rect battery terminals or the cor-rect ground. Do not lean over thebattery when making connections.

6. Start the engine of the vehicle withthe booster battery and let it run at2,000 rpm, then start the engine ofthe vehicle with the dischargedbattery.

If the cause of your battery discharg-ing is not apparent, you should haveyour vehicle checked by anAuthorised Kia Dealer.

Push-starting Your manual transaxle-equippedvehicle should not be push-startedbecause it might damage the emis-sion control system.Vehicles equipped with automatictransaxle cannot be push-started.Follow the directions in this sectionfor jump-starting.

CAUTIONNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge for-ward when the engine startscould cause a collision with thetow vehicle.

CAUTION - Battery cablesDo not connect the jumpercable from the negative terminalof the booster battery to thenegative terminal of the dis-charged battery. This can causethe discharged battery to over-heat and crack, releasing bat-tery acid.


86

OVERHEATING If your temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, if you experience a lossof power, or if you hear a loud knock-ing or pinging noise, the engine hasprobably overheated. Should any ofthese symptoms occur, use the fol-lowing procedure:1. Turn on the hazard warning flash-

er, then drive to the nearest safelocation and stop your vehicle; setthe automatic transaxle in P(Park), or shift the manualtransaxle to N (Neutral) and applythe parking brake.

2. Make sure the air conditioner is off.3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of

the radiator, stop the engine andcall an Authorised Kia Dealer forassistance.

If coolant is not boiling out, allowthe engine to idle and open thebonnet to permit the engine to coolgradually.

If the temperature does not godown with the engine idling, stopthe engine and allow sufficienttime for it to cool.

4. The coolant level should then bechecked. If the level in the reser-voir is low, look for leaks at theradiator hoses and connections,heater hoses and connections,radiator, and water pump. If youfind a major leak or another prob-lem that may have caused theengine to overheat, do not operatethe engine until it has been cor-rected. Call an Authorised KiaDealer for assistance. If you do notfind a leak or other problem, care-fully add coolant to the reservoir.

WARNINGDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot.This canallow coolant to be blown out ofthe opening and cause seriousburns.

WARNINGWhilst the engine is running,keep hair, hands and clothingaway from moving parts such asthe fan and drive belts to pre-vent injury.

CAUTIONSerious loss of coolant indi-cates there is a leak in the cool-ing system and this should bechecked as soon as possible byan authorised KIA dealer.

6 9


ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION

Fuses A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-tected from electrical overload dam-age by fuses.

This vehicle has two fuse panels,one located in the driver's side, theother in the engine compartment.The diesel engine has more one fusepanel which located in the enginecompartment near the washer tankreservior.If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, checkthe appropriate circuit fuse. If a fusehas blown, the element inside thefuse will be melted.If the electrical system does notwork, first check the driver’s sidefuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse withone of the same rating.If the replacement fuse blows, thisindicates an electrical problem. Avoidusing the system involved and imme-diately consult an Authorised KiaDealer.

Fuse replacement

1VQA4037

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage through over-heating and possibly a fire.

• Never install a wire instead ofthe proper fuse - even as atemporary repair. It may causeextensive wiring damage andpossibly a fire.

• Do not use a screwdriver orany other metal object toremove fuses because it maycause a short circuit and dam-age the system.


106

Inner panel fuse replacement1. Turn the ignition switch and all

other switches off.2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straightout. Use the removal tool providedin the engine compartment fusepanel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown.Spare fuses are provided in theinner fuse panel (or in the enginecompartment fuse panel).

5. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorisedKia dealer.

If you do not have a spare, use afuse of the same rating from a circuityou may not need for operating thevehicle, such as the cigarette lighterfuse.If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work and thefuses are OK, check the fuse block inthe engine compartment. If a fuse isblown, it must be replaced.

OED066002R OED066003

6 11


Memory fuseYour vehicle is equipped with a mem-ory fuse to prevent battery dischargeif your vehicle is parked withoutbeing operated for prolonged peri-ods. Use the following proceduresbefore parking the vehicle for pro-longed period.

1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail

lights.3. Open the inner fuse panel cover

and pull up the memory fuse(ROOM LP 15A).

✽✽ NOTICE• If the memory fuse is pulled up

from the fuse panel, the warningchime, audio, clock and interiorlamps, etc., will not operate. Someitems must be reset after replace-ment.

• Even though the memory fuse ispulled up, the battery can still bedischarged by operation of theheadlights or other electricaldevices.OED066010R

Memory fuse


126

Engine compartment1. Turn the ignition switch and all

other switches off.2. Remove the fuse box cover by

pressing the taps and pulling up.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace itif it is blown.

4. Push in a new fuse of the samerating, and make sure it fits tightlyin the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an AuthorisedKia Dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter checking the fuse box in theengine compartment, securelyinstall the fuse box cover. If not,electrical failures may occur fromwater leaking in.

Main fuseIf the ALTERNATOR (Petrol 125A,Diesel 150A) or MDPS (80A) fuseare blown, it must be removed as fol-lows:1. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.2. Remove the screws shown in the

picture above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

OED066006

OED066004

OED066005

Diesel only

6 13


✽✽ NOTICENot all fuse panel descriptions inthis manual may be applicable toyour vehicle. It is accurate at thetime of printing. When you inspectthe fuse panel in your vehicle, referto the fuse panel label.

Fuse/Relay panel descriptionInside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Inner fuse panel Engine compartment fuse panel

OED066007R/ OED066008/ OED066009

Diesel only


146

Inner fuse panelDescription Fuse rating Protected component

START 10A Start motor relayA/CON SW 10A Air-conditioning systemHTD MIRR 10A Outside review mirror defrosterSEAT HTR 15A Seat warmerA/CON 10A Air-conditioning systemHEAD LAMP 10A HeadlightFR WIPER 25A Wiper (front)RR WIPER 15A Rear wiperDRL OFF - Daytime running light offRR FOG 10A Fog light (rear)P/WDW (LH) 25A Power window (left)CLOCK 10A ClockC/LIGHTER 15A Cigar lighterDR LOCK 20A Sunroof, ICM relay boxDEICER 20A Front deicer relaySTOP 15A Stop lamp switchROOM LP 15A Room lampAUDIO 15A Audio, Trip ComputerT/LID 15A Rear hatchSAFETY P/WDW RH 25A Safety power window (right)SAFETY P/WDW LH 25A Safety power window (left)P/WDW(RH) 25A Power window (right)P/OUTLET 15A Electrical power socketT/SIG 10A Switch module

Description Fuse rating Protected componentA/BAG IND 10A Air bag indicatorCLUSTER 10A ClusterA/BAG 15A Air bagSPARE 15A Spare fuseTAIL RH 10A Tail light (right)TAIL LH 10A Tail light (left)

6 15


Description Fuse rating Protected componentGLOW PLUG 80A Glow plugPTC HEATER #1 50A PTC heater 1PTC HEATER #2 50A PTC heater 2PTC HEATER #3 50A PTC heater 3FUEL FILTER HEATER 30A Fuel filter heater

Engine compartment fuse panel (Diesel only)

Description Fuse rating Protected componentALT 125A/150A (DIESEL) AlternatorMDPS 80A MDPS control moduleABS 2 20A Anti-lock brake systemABS 1 40A Anti-lock brake systemB+.1 50A In panel B+RR HTD 40A Outside rearview mirror defrosterBLOWER 40A BlowerC/FAN 40A Condenser fan B+.2 50A In panel B+IGN 2 40A Ignition switchIGN 1 30A Ignition switchECU 30A Engine control unitSPARE.1 20A Spare fuseFR FOG 15A Fog light relay (front)A/CON 10A Air conditioner relayHAZARD 15A Hazard warning lightF/PUMP 15A Fuel pump relayECU.1 10A Engine control unitECU.3 10A Engine control unitECU.4 20A Engine control unitINJ 15A Air conditioner relay, InjectorSNSR.2 10A SensorsHORN 15A Horn relayABS 10A Anti-lock brake system

Description Fuse rating Protected componentECU.2 10A Condenser, Ignition coilB/UP 10A Back-up lightH/LP LO-RH 10A Headlight (low beam-right)H/LP LO-LH 10A Headlight (low-left)H/LP HI 20A Headlight relay (high beam)SNSR.1 10A Oxygen sensorSPARE 10A spare fuseSPARE 15A spare fuseSPARE 20A spare fuse

Engine compartment fuse panel


166

TOWING

If emergency towing is necessary,we recommend having it done by anauthorised Kia dealer or a commer-cial tow-truck service. Proper liftingand towing procedures are neces-sary to prevent damage to the vehi-cle. The use of wheel dollies orflatbed is recommended.For trailer towing guidelines informa-tion, refer to section 5 “Driving Tips”.

It is acceptable to tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on the ground(without dollies) and the front wheelsoff the ground.When being towed by a commercialtow truck and wheel dollies are notused, the front of the vehicle shouldalways be lifted, not the rear.

OED066014

OED066013

OED066011 OED066012

CAUTION• Do not tow the vehicle back-

wards with the front wheels onthe ground as this may causedamage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-typeequipment. Use wheel lift orflatbed equipment.

CAUTIONWhen towing the vehicle, takecare not to cause damage to thebumper or under body of thevehicle

CAUTIONBefore towing, check the level ofthe automatic transaxle fluid. Ifit is below the "HOT" range onthe dipstick, add fluid. If youcannot add fluid, a towing dollymust be used.

6 17


When towing your vehicle in anemergency without wheel dollies :1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC

position.2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook (rear)1. Open the rear hatch and remove

the towing hook from the toolcase.

2. Remove the hole cover pressingthe lower part of the cover on therear bumper.

OED066020

CAUTIONFailure to place the transaxleshift lever in N (Neutral) maycause internal damage to thetransaxle.


186

3. Install the towing hook by turning itclockwise into the hole until it isfully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook andinstall the cover after use.

Towing with a vehicle otherthan a tow truck If towing is necessary, we recom-mend you to have it done by anAuthorised Kia dealer or a commer-cial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may betemporarily towed using a cable orchain secured to the emergency tow-ing hook under the front or rear of thevehicle. Use extreme caution whentowing the vehicle. A driver must bein the vehicle to steer it and operatethe brakes.Towing in this manner may be doneonly on hard-surfaced roads for ashort distance and at low speeds.Also, the wheels, axles, power train,steering and brakes must all be ingood condition.• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a

vehicle out of mud, sand or otherconditions from which the vehiclecannot be driven out under its ownpower.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier thanthe vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other fre-quently.

OED066022

Front

OED066023

RearOED066021

6 19


• Before emergency towing, checkthat the hook is not broken or dam-aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steadyand even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, donot pull from the side or at a verti-cal angle. Always pull straightahead.

• Use a towing strap less than 5 m(16 feet) long. Attach a white or redcloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)wide) in the middle of the strap foreasy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towingstrap is not loosened during tow-ing.

OED066029

CAUTION• Attach a towing strap to the

tow hook.• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks fortowing may damage the bodyof your vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chainspecifically intended for usein towing vehicles. Securelyfasten the cable or chain tothe towing hook provided.

WARNING Use extreme caution when tow-ing the vehicle.• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving manoeuvres whichwould place excessive stresson the emergency towinghook and towing cable orchain. The hook and towingcable or chain may break andcause serious injury or dam-age.

• If the towing vehicle can hard-ly move, do not forcibly con-tinue the towing. Contact anAuthorised Kia dealer or acommercial tow truck servicefor assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straightahead as possible.

• Keep away from the vehicleduring towing.


206

Emergency towing precau-tions• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so

the steering wheel isn’t locked.• Place the transaxle shift lever in N

(Neutral).• Release the parking bake.• Press the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you willhave reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will berequired because the power steer-ing system will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill,the brakes may overheat and brakeperformance will be reduced. Stopoften and let the brakes cool off.

Tips for towing a stuck vehicleThe following methods are effectivewhen your vehicle is stuck in mud,sand or similar substances that pre-vent the vehicle from being drivenout under its own power.• Remove the soil and sand, etc.

from the front and the back of thetyres.

• Place a stone or wood under thetyres.

CAUTIONIf the car is being towed with allfour wheels on the ground, itcan be towed only from thefront. Be sure that the transaxleis in neutral. Do not tow atspeeds greater than 40 km/h (25mph) and for more than 25 km(15 miles). Be sure the steeringis unlocked by placing the igni-tion switch in the ACC position.A driver must be in the towedvehicle to operate the steeringand brakes.

6 21


TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)

(1) Low Tyre Pressure Telltale(2) Low Tyre Pressure Position Telltale(3) TPMS Malfunction Indicator

Each tyre, including the spare (ifequipped), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tyre inflation pres-sure label. (If your vehicle has tyresof a different size than the size indi-cated on the vehicle placard or tyreinflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper inflation pres-sure for those tyres.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atyre pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tyrepressure telltale when one or moreof your tyres is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the lowtyre pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tyres assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on a sig-nificantly under-inflated tyre causesthe tyre to overheat and can lead totyre failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tyre treadlife, and may affect the vehicle’s han-dling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tyre mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tyre pres-sure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina-tion of the TPMS low tyre pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is provided by aseparate telltale, which displays thesymbol "TPMS" when illuminated.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tyre pres-sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of rea-sons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tyres orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctionindicator after replacing one or moretyres or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alter-nate tyres and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function proper-ly.

OED066030


226

Low tyre pressuretelltale

Low tyre pressureposition telltale

The low tyre pressure and the lowtyre pressure position telltales illumi-nate when one or more tyres isunder inflated. The low tyre pressureposition telltale indicates which tyreor tyres are under inflated.Immediately reduce your speed,avoid hard cornering and anticipateincreased stopping distances. Youshould stop and check your tyres assoon as possible when the tyres arecool. And inflate the tyres to theproper pressure as indicated on thevehicle’s placard or tyre inflationpressure label located on the driver’sside centre pillar outer panel. If youcannot reach a service station or ifthe tyre cannot hold the newly addedair, replace the low pressure tyre withthe spare tyre.

However, if you replace the low pres-sure tyre with the spare tyre or othertyres, the low tyre pressure and posi-tion telltales will go off and the TPMSmalfunction indicator will go on aftera few minutes. For the spare tyre orother tyres are not equipped with atyre pressure monitoring sensor.

TPMS (Tyre PressureMonitoring System) malfunc-tion indicatorThe TPMS malfunction indicatorcomes on and stays on when there isa problem with the Tyre PressureMonitoring System. If Front Left sen-sor fails, the TPMS malfunction indica-tor comes on, but if Front Right, RearLeft, or Rear Right tyre is under-inflat-ed, the low tyre pressure and positiontelltales may come on together withthe TPMS malfunction indicator.Have the system checked by anauthorised Kia dealer as soon as pos-sible to determine the cause of theproblem.

CAUTIONIn winter or cold weather, thelow tyre pressure telltale may beilluminated if the tyre pressurewas adjusted to the recom-mended tyre inflation pressurein warm weather. It does notmean your TPMS is malfunction-ing because the decreased tem-perature leads to a proportionallowering of tyre pressure.When you drive your vehiclefrom a warm area to a cold areaor from a cold area to a warmarea, or the outside temperaturesignificantly increases ordecreases, you should checkthe tyre inflation pressure andadjust the tyres to the recom-mended tyre inflation pressure.

WARNING - Low tyrepressure

Significantly low tyre pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pres-sure tyres will cause the tyres tooverheat and fail.

6 23


✽✽ NOTICE• The TPMS malfunction indicator

may be illuminated if the vehicle ismoving around electric powersupply cable or radio transmittersuch as police stations, govern-ment and public offices, broad-casting stations, military installa-tions, airports, or transmittingtower, etc. this can interfere withnormal operation of the TyrePressure Monitoring System(TPMS).

• The TPMS malfunction indicatormay be illuminated if some elec-tronic devices, such as notebookcomputers, are used in the vehicle.This can interfere with normaloperation of the Tyre PressureMonitoring System (TPMS).

Changing a tyre with TPMSIf you have a flat tyre, the low tyrepressure and position telltales willcome on. Have the flat tyre repairedby an authorised Kia dealer as soonas possible or replace the flat tyrewith the spare tyre.NEVER use a puncture-repairingagent to repair and/or inflate a lowpressure tyre. If used, you will haveto replace the tyre pressure sensor.Each wheel is equipped with a tyrepressure sensor mounted inside thetyre behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you always haveyour tyres serviced by an authorisedKia dealer as soon as possible.The spare tyre is not equipped with atyre pressure monitoring sensor.Therefore, when the low pressuretyre is replaced with the spare tyre,the low tyre pressure and the lowtyre pressure position telltales willextinguish and the TPMS malfunc-tion indicator will illuminate after afew minutes.

This TPMS malfunction indicatormay remain light until the originaltyre equipped with a tyre pressuresensor is re-inflated to the recom-mended pressure and re-installed onthe vehicle.Once the low pressure tyre is re-inflated to the recommended pres-sure and installed on the vehicle, theTPMS malfunction indicator and thelow tyre pressure and position tell-tales will extinguish within a few min-utes.If the indicators are not extinguishedafter a few minutes, please visit anauthorised Kia dealer.You may not be able to identify a lowtyre by simply looking at it. Alwaysuse a good quality tyre pressuregauge to measure the tyre's inflationpressure. Please note that a tyre thatis hot (from being driven) will have ahigher pressure measurement than atyre that is cold (from sitting station-ary for at least 3 hours and drivenless than 1 mile (1.6km) during that 3hour period). Allow the tyre to coolbefore measuring the inflation pres-sure.


246

Always be sure the tyre is cold beforeinflating to the recommended pres-sure.A cold tyre means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1 mile (1.6km) in that 3hour period.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not use any tyre sealant if yourvehicle is equipped with a TyrePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage the tyrepressure sensors.

WARNING - TPMS• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tyre dam-age caused by external fac-tors.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator and slowlymove to a safe position off theroad.

WARNINGTampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tyre PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)components may interfere withthe system's ability to warn thedriver of low tyre pressure con-ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modify-ing, or disabling the TyrePressure Monitoring System(TPMS) components may voidthe warranty for that portion ofthe vehicle.

6 25


IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE

The spare tyre, jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench are stored inthe luggage compartment. Move thecarpeting out of the way to reach thisequipment.

Removing the spare tyre Turn the tyre hold-down wing boltcounterclockwise.Store the tyre in the reverse order ofremoval.To prevent the spare tyre and toolsfrom “rattling” whilst the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

Important - use of compactspare tyre (if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tyre. This compact sparetyre takes up less space than a reg-ular-size tyre. This tyre is smallerthan a conventional tyre and isdesigned for temporary use only.

OED066024 OED066025

CAUTION• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is inuse. The compact spareshould be replaced by theproper conventional tyre andrim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicleis not recommended withmore than one compact sparetyre in use at the same time.


266

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).

✽✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tyre. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tyre,observe the following precautions:• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); ahigher speed could damage thetyre.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, couldseriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of thistyre could result in tyre failure, lossof vehicle control, and possiblepersonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tyre.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tyre diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tyre and reduces theground clearance approximately 1inch (25 mm), which could result indamage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic car wash.

• Do not use tyre chains on this tyre.Because of the smaller size, a tyrechain will not fit properly. This coulddamage the vehicle and result inloss of the chain.

• This tyre should not be installed onthe front axle if the vehicle must bedriven in snow or on ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tyreon any other vehicle because thistyre has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tyre’s tread life isshorter than a regular tyre. Inspectyour compact spare tyre regularlyand replace worn compact sparetyres with the same size and design,mounted on the same wheel.

• The temporary spare tyre should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tyres, snow tyres,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the temporary spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car compo-nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one tempo-rary spare tyre at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer whilst the tem-porary spare tyre is installed.

WARNING This spare tyre should be usedonly for VERY short distances.Compact spares should NEVERbe used for long drives orextended distances.

6 27


Changing tyres Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytyre changing only.Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

Tyre replacement 1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.2. Shift the shift lever into R

(Reverse) with manual transaxleor P (Park) with automatictransaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-er.

WARNING - Changingtyres

• Never attempt vehicle repairsin the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tyre.The jack shouldbe used on level firm groundwhenever possible. If you can-not find a firm, level place offthe road, call a towing servicecompany for assistance.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Be sure to use the correct

front and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; never usethe bumpers or any other partof the vehicle for jack support.

• The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack causing seriousinjury or death. No personshould place any portion oftheir body under a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack ;use vehicle support stands.

• Do not start or run the enginewhilst the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle whilst it is onthe jack.

• Make sure any children pres-ent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.

OED066033


286

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack, jack handle, and spare tyrefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tyrehas been raised off the ground.

WARNING - Changing atyre

• To prevent vehicle movementwhilst changing a tyre, alwaysset the parking brake fully, andalways block the wheel diago-nally opposite the wheel beingchanged.

• It is recommended that thewheels of the vehicle bechocked, and that no personshould remain in a vehicle thatis being jacked.

OED066031R OED066026

6 29


7. Place the jack at the front or rearjacking position closest to the tyreyou are changing. Place the jackat the designated locations underthe frame. The jacking positionsare plates welded to the framewith two tabs and a raised dot toindex with the jack.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackand turn it clockwise, raising thevehicle until the tyre just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 30 mm (1.2 in).Before removing the wheel lugnuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-ble and that there is no chance formovement or slippage.

9. Loosen the wheel nuts andremove them with your fingers.Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. Toput the wheel on the hub, pick upthe spare tyre, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheelonto them. If this is difficult, tip thewheel slightly and get the top holein the wheel lined up with the topstud. Then jiggle the wheel backand forth until the wheel can beslid over the other studs.

WARNING - Jack locationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

OED066032R OED066027


306

10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it onthe studs, put the wheel nuts onthe studs and tighten them fingertight.The nuts should be installedwith their tapered small diameterends directed inward. Jiggle thetyre to be sure it is completelyseated, then tighten the nuts asmuch as possible with your fin-gers again.

11. Lower the car to the ground byturning the wheel nut wrenchcounterclockwise. Then position the wrench as shown

in the drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not standon the wrench handle or use anextension pipe over the wrench han-dle. Go around the wheel tighteningevery other nut until they are all tight.Then double-check each nut fortightness. After changing wheels,have an authorised KIA dealer tight-en the wheel nuts to their propertorque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)

OED066028

WARNINGWheels and wheel covers mayhave sharp edges. Handle themcarefully to avoid possiblesevere injury. Before putting thewheel into place, be sure thatthere is nothing on the hub orwheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with thewheel from fitting solidlyagainst the hub.If there is, remove it. If there isnot good contact on the mount-ing surface between the wheeland hub, the wheel nuts couldcome loose and cause the lossof a wheel. Loss of a wheel mayresult in loss of control of thevehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

6 31


If you have a tyre gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure.If the pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the cor-rect pressure. If it is too high, adjustit until it is correct. Always reinstallthe valve cap after checking oradjusting tyre pressure. If the cap isnot replaced, air may leak from thetyre. If you lose a valve cap, buyanother and install it as soon as pos-sible.After you have changed wheels,always secure the flat tyre in its placeand return the jack and tools to theirproper storage locations.

To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench and spare tyrefrom rattling whilst the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threadson the wheel studs and nuts.Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nutsremoved are reinstalled - or, ifreplaced, that nuts with metricthreads and the same chamferconfiguration are used.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric stud orvice-versa will not secure thewheel to the hub properly andwill damage the stud so that itmust be replaced.Note that most lug nuts do nothave metric threads. Be sure touse extreme care in checkingfor thread style before installingaftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult anAuthorised Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Wheel studsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a colli-sion.

WARNINGCheck the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installingthe spare tyre. Adjust it to thespecified pressure, if necessary.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

7

10

Maintenance services / 7-2Normal maintenance schedule / 7-4, 7-10Maintenance under severe usage conditions / 7-8, 7-14Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-16Owner maintenance / 7-20Engine compartment / 7-23Engine oil / 7-25Engine cooling system / 7-27Brakes and clutch / 7-30Automatic transaxle / 7-32Lubricants and fluids / 7-34Fuel filter / 7-35Air cleaner / 7-36Climate control air filter / 7-38Wiper blades / 7-40Battery / 7-43

Tyres and wheels / 7-46Bulb replacement / 7-55Exterior care / 7-62Interior care / 7-66

Maintenance

Maintenance

27

MAINTENANCE SERVICESYou should exercise the utmost careto prevent damage to your vehicleand injury to yourself whenever per-forming any maintenance or inspec-tion procedures.Should you have any doubts con-cerning the inspection or servicing ofyour vehicle, we strongly recom-mend that you have an AuthorisedKia Dealer perform this work.An Authorised Kia Dealer has facto-ry-trained technicians and genuineKia parts to service your vehicleproperly. For expert advice and qual-ity service, see an Authorised KiaDealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-cient servicing may result in opera-tional problems with your vehicle thatcould lead to vehicle damage, anaccident, or personal injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽ NOTICEMaintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsi-bility.

You should retain documents thatshow proper maintenance has beenperformed on your vehicle in accor-dance with the scheduled mainte-nance service charts shown on thefollowing pages. You need this infor-mation to establish your compliancewith the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your Kia warranties.Detailed warranty information is pro-vided in your Warranty & Maintenancebook.

Repairs and adjustments required asa result of improper maintenance ora lack of required maintenance arenot covered.We recommend you have your vehi-cle maintained and repaired by anauthorised Kia dealer.An authorised Kia dealer meets Kia’shigh service quality standards andreceives technical support from Kiain order to provide you with a highlevel of service satisfaction.

7 3

Maintenance

Scheduled maintenance serv-ice Follow Normal MaintenanceSchedule if the vehicle is usuallyoperated where none of the followingconditions apply. If any of the followingconditions apply, follow MaintenanceUnder Severe Usage Conditions.• Repeated short distance driving.• Driving in dusty conditions or

sandy areas.• Extensive use of brakes.• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.• Driving on rough or muddy roads.• Driving in mountainous areas.• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.• Driving for a prolonged period in

cold temperatures and/or extreme-ly humid climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavycity traffic during hot weatherabove 32°C (90°F).

If your vehicle is operated under theabove conditions, you shouldinspect, replace or refill more fre-quently than the following NormalMaintenance Schedule. After 96month or 80,000 miles (120,000 km,Petrol Engine) / 100,000 miles(160,000 km, Diesel Engine) contin-ue to follow the prescribed mainte-nance intervals.

Maintenance

47

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - PETROL ENGINE

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R : Replace or change.*1 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).

Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.*2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.*3 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.*4 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. An authroized KIA dealer

should perform the operation.

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

Drive belts *1 I I I I I I I I

Engine oil and engine oil filter *2 R R R R R R R R

Engine timing belt 2.0L Petrol

Tensioner/idler 2.0L Petrol

Air cleaner filter I I R I I R I I

Spark plugs1.4/1.6L Petrol R R

2.0L Petrol R R R R

Valve clearance *4

Inspect every 60,000 miles (90,000 km) or 48 months and replace every 90,000 miles (135,000 km) or 72 months *3

Inspect when timing belt is inspected or replaced

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEITEM

Inspect every 60,000 miles (90,000 km) or 48 months *3

7 5

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - PETROL ENGINE (cont.)

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R : Replace or change.


Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

Vapour hose and fuel filler cap I I I I

Fuel tank air filter I I R I I R I I

Vacuum and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I

Vacuum hose (for EGR & throttle body) I I I I I I I I

Fuel filter R R

Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I

Cooling systemInspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day

Inspect “Water pump” when replacing the drive belt or timing belt


MAINTENANCEITEM

Maintenance

67

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - PETROL ENGINE (cont.) Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

Engine coolant *5

Battery condition I I I I I I I I

All electrical systems I I I I

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I

Brake pedal, clutch pedal I I I I

Parking brake I I I I

Brake/clutch fluid I R I R I R I R

Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R : Replace or change.*3 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.*5 : When adding coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the

coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

At first, replace at 60,000 miles (90,000 km) or 60 months:after that, replace every 30,000 miles (45,000 km) or 24 months *3


MAINTENANCEITEM

7 7

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - PETROL ENGINE (cont.)



Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I

Drive shaft and boots I I I I I I I I

Tyre (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I

Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I

Bolt and nuts on chassis and body I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped) I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner compressor (if equipped) I I I I I I I I

Climate control air filter (if equipped) R R R R R R R R

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) I I I I I I I I

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped) I I I I I R I I


MAINTENANCEITEM

Maintenance

87

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - PETROL ENGINEThe following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace

Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 5,000 miles (7,500 km) or 6 months A, B, C, D, E,

F, G, H, I

Air cleaner filter R C, E

Spark plugs R B, H

Engine timing belt 2.0L Petrol R Every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months D, E, F, G

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 62,500 miles (100,000 km)*1 C, D, E, G, H, I, J

Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 30,000 miles (45,000 km) A, C, E, F, G, H, I

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I C, D, E, F, G

MAINTENANCE ITEM Maintenanceoperation

Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Replace more frequently depending on the condition

Inspect more frequently depending on the condition


*1 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

7 9

Maintenance

Severe driving conditionsA : Repeated short distance drivingB : Extensive idlingC : Driving in dusty, rough roadsD : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive

materials or in very cold weatherE : Driving in sandy areasF : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during

hot weather above 32 °C (90 °F)

G : Driving in mountainous areas.H : Towing a trailerI : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle

towingJ : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)

Front suspension ball joints I C, D, E, F, G

Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I C, D, E, G, H

Parking brake I C, D, G, H

Drive shaft and boots I C, D, E, F, G, H, I

Climate control air filter (if equipped) R C, E


Maintenance intervals






Maintenance

107

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R : Replace or change.*1 : Adjust alternator and power steering (and water pump drive belt) and air conditioner drive belt (if equipped).

Inspect and if necessary correct or replace.*2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before starting a long trip.*3 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.*a : CPF - Catalyzed Particulate filter


MAINTENANCEITEM


Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Miles×1,000 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100

Km×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Drive belts *1 I I I I I I I I

Engine oil and engine oil filter *2Without CPF *a R R R R R R R R

With CPF *a

Engine timing belt 2.0L Diesel I R*3

Tensioner/idler/damper pulley

Air cleaner filter I R I R I R I R

Inspect when replacing the drive belt or timing belt

Replace every 10,000 miles (15,000 km)

7 11

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (cont.)

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R : Replace or change.*3 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.*4 : If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the European standards EN590, replace it more frequently.

Consult an authorised Kia dealer for details.


MAINTENANCEITEM


Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Miles×1,000 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100

Km×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Vapour hose and fuel filler cap I I I I I I I I

PCV and Crank ventilation hose I I I I I I I I

Vacuum hose (for EGR & throttle body) I I I I I I I I

Vacuum pump and vacuum hose I I I I I I I I

Vacuum pump oil hose I I I I I I I I

Fuel filter cartridge *4

Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I

Cooling systemInspect “Coolant level adjustment and leak” every day

Replace every 20,000 miles (30,000 km) *3

Inspect “Water pump” when replacing the drive belt or timing belt

Maintenance

127

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (cont.) Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Miles×1,000 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100

Km×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Engine coolant *5

Battery condition I I I I I I I I

All electrical systems I I I I I I I I

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I

Brake pedal, clutch pedal I I I I I I I I

Parking brake I I I I I I I I

Brake/clutch fluid I R I R I R I R

Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.R : Replace or change.*3 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.*5 : When adding coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the

coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

At first, replace at 62,500 miles (100,000 km) or 60 months:after that, replace every 25,000 miles (40,000 km) or 24 months *3


MAINTENANCEITEM

7 13

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (cont.)



Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

Miles×1,000 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100

Km×1,000 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I

Drive shaft and boots I I I I I I I I

Tyre (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I

Front suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I

Bolt and nuts on chassis and body I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner refrigerant (if equipped) I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner compressor (if equipped) I I I I I I I I

Climate control air filter (if equipped) R R R R R R R R

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) I I I I I I I I


MAINTENANCEITEM

Maintenance

147

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - DIESEL ENGINEThe following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace





*1 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

Engine oil and engine oil filter R Every 5,000 miles (7,500 km) or 6 monthsA, B, C, F, G,

H, I, J, K, L

Air cleaner filter R C, E

Engine timing belt 2.0L Diesel R Every 40,000 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months D, E, F, G

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) R Every 62,500 miles (100,000 km)*1 C, D, E, G, H, I, K

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I C, D, E, F, G

7 15

Maintenance

Severe driving conditionsA : Repeated short distance drivingB : Extensive idlingC : Driving in dusty, rough roadsD : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive

materials or in very cold weatherE : Driving in sandy areasF : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during

hot weather above 32 °C (90 °F)

G : Driving in mountainous areas.H : Towing a trailerI : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle

towingJ : Driving in very cold weatherK : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)L : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

Front suspension ball joints I C, D, E, F, G

Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors I C, D, E, G, H

Parking brake I C, D, G, H

Drive shaft and boots I C, D, E, F, I, G, H

Climate control air filter (if equipped) R C, E








Maintenance

167

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMSEngine oil and filterThe engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified inthe maintenance schedule. If the caris being driven in severe conditions,more frequent oil and filter changesare required.

Drive beltsInspect all drive belts for evidence ofcuts, cracks, excessive wear or oilsaturation and replace if necessary.Drive belts should be checked peri-odically for proper tension andadjusted as necessary.

Fuel filter (cartridge)A clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven,damage the emission system andcause multiple issues such as hardstarting. If an excessive amount offoreign matter accumulates in thefuel tank, the filter may requirereplacement more frequently.After installing a new filter, run theengine for several minutes, andcheck for leaks at the connections.Fuel filters should be installed by anauthorised KIA dealer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nectionsCheck the fuel lines, fuel hoses andconnections for leakage and dam-age. Have an authorised KIA dealerreplace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

WARNING - Diesel onlyNever work on injection systemwith engine running or within 30seconds after shutting offengine. High pressure pump,rail, injectors and high pressurepipes are subject to high pres-sure even after the enginestopped. The fuel jet producedby fuel leaks may cause seriousinjury, if it touch the body.People using pacemakersshould not move than 30cmcloser to the ECU or wiring har-ness within the engine roomwhilst engine is running, sincethe high currents in theCommon Rail system produceconsiderable magnetic fields.

7 17

Maintenance

Timing belt (if equipped)Inspect all parts related to the timingbelt for damage and deformation.Replace any damaged parts immedi-ately.

Vapour hose and fuel filler capThe vapour hose and fuel filler capshould be inspected at those inter-vals specified in the maintenanceschedule. Make sure that a newvapour hose or fuel filler cap is cor-rectly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilationhoses (if equipped)Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-dence of heat and/or mechanicaldamage. Hard and brittle rubber,cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, andexcessive swelling indicate deterio-ration. Particular attention should bepaid to examine those hose surfacesnearest to high heat sources, suchas the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assurethat the hoses do not come in con-tact with any heat source, sharpedges or moving component whichmight cause heat damage ormechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps andcouplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are pres-ent. Hoses should be replacedimmediately if there is any evidenceof deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filterA Genuine KIA air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter isreplaced.

Spark plugs (for petrol engine)Make sure to install new spark plugsof the correct heat range.

Valve clearance (if equipped)Inspect excessive valve noise and/orengine vibration and adjust if neces-sary. An authorised KIA dealershould perform the operation.

Maintenance

187

Cooling systemCheck cooling system components,such as radiator, coolant reservoir,hoses and connections for leakageand damage. Replace any damagedparts.

CoolantThe coolant should be changed atthe intervals specified in the mainte-nance schedule.

Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)Inspect the manual transaxle fluidaccording to the maintenance sched-ule.

Automatic transaxle fluid(if equipped)The fluid level should be in the "HOT"range of the dipstick, after the engineand transaxle are at normal operat-ing temperature. Check the automat-ic transaxle fluid level with the enginerunning and the transaxle in neutral,with the parking brake properlyapplied.

Brake hoses and linesVisually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration andany leakage. Replace any deteriorat-ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluidCheck brake fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir. The level should bebetween “MIN” and “MAX” marks onthe side of the reservoir. Use onlyhydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Parking brakeInspect the parking brake systemincluding the parking brake pedaland cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipersand rotorsCheck the pads for excessive wear,discs for run out and wear, andcalipers for fluid leakage.

Suspension mounting boltsCheck the suspension connectionsfor looseness or damage. Retightento the specified torque.

7 19

Maintenance

Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball jointWith the vehicle stopped and engineoff, check for excessive free-play inthe steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or dam-age. Check the dust boots and balljoints for deterioration, cracks, ordamage. Replace any damagedparts.

Drive shafts and bootsCheck the drive shafts, boots andclamps for cracks, deterioration, ordamage. Replace any damagedparts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

Air conditioning refrigerant (if equipped)Check the air conditioning lines andconnections for leakage and dam-age.

Maintenance

207

OWNER MAINTENANCE Owner maintenance schedule The following lists are vehicle checksand inspections that should be per-formed by the owner or anAuthorised Kia Dealer at the fre-quencies indicated to help ensuresafe, dependable operation of yourvehicle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your deal-er as soon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checksare generally not covered by war-ranties and you may be charged forlabour, parts and lubricants used.

When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check coolant level in coolant

reservoir.

• Check the windscreen washer fluidlevel.

• Look for low or under-inflatedtyres.

Whilst operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell ofexhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steer-ing effort or looseness in the steer-ing wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantlyturns slightly or “pulls” to one sidewhen traveling on smooth, levelroad.

• When stopping, listen and checkfor strange sounds, pulling to oneside, increased brake pedal travelor “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in theoperation of your transaxle occurs,check the transaxle fluid level.

• Check automatic transaxle P(Park) function.

• Check parking brake.• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the airconditioning system after use isnormal).

WARNING Be careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hotcoolant and steam may blow outunder pressure. This couldcause serious injury.

7 21

Maintenance

At least monthly:• Check coolant level in the coolant

recovery reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turnsignals and hazard warning flash-ers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltyres including the spare.

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall) :• Check radiator, heater, inter cooler,

turbocharger and air conditioninghoses for leaks or da-mage.

• Check windscreen washer sprayand wiper operation. Clean wiperblades with clean cloth dampenedwith washer fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for

wear and function.• Check for worn tyres and loose

wheel lug nuts.

At least once a year :• Clean body and door drain holes.• Lubricate door hinges and checks,

and bonnet hinges.• Lubricate door and bonnet locks

and latches.• Lubricate door rubber weather-

strips.• Check the air conditioning system

before the warm weather season.• Inspect and lubricate automatic

transaxle linkage and controls.• Clean battery and terminals.• Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance

227

Owner maintenance precau-tions Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section,several procedures can be done onlyby an Authorised Kia Dealer withspecial tools.

✽✽ NOTICEImproper owner maintenance dur-ing the warranty period may affectwarranty coverage. For details, readthe separate Kia Warranty &Maintenance book provided withthe vehicle. If you're unsure aboutany servicing or maintenance proce-dure, have it done by an AuthorisedKia Dealer.

WARNING - Maintenancework

• Performing maintenance workon a vehicle can be dangerous.You can be seriously injuredwhilst performing some main-tenance procedures. If you lacksufficient knowledge and expe-rience or the proper tools andequipment to do the work,have it done by an AuthorisedKia Dealer.

• Working under the bonnet withthe engine running is danger-ous. It becomes even moredangerous when you wearjewelry or loose clothing.These can become entangledin moving parts and result ininjury. Therefore, if you mustrun the engine whilst workingunder the bonnet, make cer-tain that you remove all jewel-ry (especially rings, bracelets,watches, and necklaces) andall neckties, scarves, and simi-lar loose clothing before get-ting near the engine or coolingfans.

WARNING - Diesel EngineNever work on injection systemwith engine running or within 30seconds after shutting offengine. High-pressure pump,rail, injectors and high-pressurepipes are subject to high pres-sure even after the enginestopped. The fuel jet producedby fuel leaks may cause seriousinjury, if it touches the body.People using pacemakersshould not move than 30cmcloser to the ECU or wiring har-ness within the engine roomwhilst engine is running, sincethe high currents in the elec-tronic engine control systemproduce considerable magneticfields.

7 23

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OED076001R/OED076002



3. Air cleaner


5. Fuse box



8. Radiator cap

9. Auto transaxle oil dipstick (if equipped)



12. Clutch fluid reservoir (if equipped)

■■ 1.4L/1.6L Petrol Engine

■■ 2.0L Petrol Engine

Maintenance

247

OED076004R/OED076003



3. Air cleaner


5. Fuse box



8. Radiator cap



■■ 1.6L Diesel Engine

■■ 2.0L Diesel Engine

7 25

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level

ground.2. Start the engine and allow it to

reach normal operating tempera-ture.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for afew minutes (about 5 minutes) forthe oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,and re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again andcheck the level. The level shouldbe between F and L. If it is near or at L, add enough oil to

bring the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use only the specified engine oil.(Refer to “Recommended Lubricants”in chapter 8.)

OED076005 OED076007R

WARNING - Radiator hoseBe very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

Maintenance

267

Changing the engine oil andfilterHave engine oil and filter changed byan authorised KIA dealer accordingto the Maintenance Schedule at thebeginning of this section.

WARNINGUsed engine oil may cause irri-tation or cancer of the skin if leftin contact with the skin for pro-longed periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicalsthat have caused cancer in lab-oratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap andwarm water as soon as possibleafter handling used oil.

7 27

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM The high-pressure cooling systemhas a reservoir filled with year-roundantifreeze coolant. The reservoir isfilled at the factory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, atthe beginning of the winter season,and before traveling to a colder cli-mate.

Checking the coolant level

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

• Never attempt to remove theradiator cap whilst the engineis operating or hot. Doing somight lead to cooling systemand engine damage and couldresult in serious personalinjury from escaping hotcoolant or steam.

• Turn the engine off and waituntil it cools down. Even then,use extreme care whenremoving the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it,and turn it counterclockwiseslowly to the first stop. Stepback whilst the pressure isreleased from the cooling sys-tem. When you are sure all thepressure has been released,press down on the cap, usinga thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Even if the engine is not oper-

ating, do not remove the radi-ator cap or the drain plugwhilst the engine and radiatorare hot. Hot coolant and steammay still blow out under pres-sure, causing serious injury.

Maintenance

287

Check the condition and connectionsof all cooling system hoses andheater hoses. Replace any swollenor deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filledbetween F and L or MAX and MINmarked on the side of the coolantreservoir when the engine is cool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughspecified coolant to provide protec-tion against freezing and corrosion.Bring the level to F, but do not over-fill. If frequent additions are required,see an Authorised Kia Dealer for acooling system inspection.

Recommended engine coolant • Use only soft (de-mineralized)

water in the coolant mixture.• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must beprotected by an ethylene-glycol-based coolant to prevent corrosionand freezing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the spec-ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or lessthan 35% antifreeze, which wouldreduce the effectiveness of thesolution.

OED076020

OED076024A

Type A

Type B

7 29

Maintenance

For mixture percentage, refer to thefollowing table.

Changing the coolantHave coolant changed by an autho-rised KIA dealer according to theMaintenance Schedule at the begin-ning of this section.

WARNINGDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiatorare hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure. This could cause seri-ous injury.

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

CoolantSolution

Water

CAUTIONPut a thick cloth or fabricaround the radiator cap beforerefilling the coolant in order toprevent the coolant from over-flowing into engine parts suchas generator.

OED076022

OED076024

OED076056

Type B

Type A

Type C

Maintenance

307

BRAKES AND CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking brake fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoirperiodically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.Before removing the reservoir capand adding brake fluid, clean thearea around the reservoir cap thor-oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-ination.

If the level is low, add fluid to theMAX level. The level will fall withaccumulated mileage. This is a nor-mal condition associated with thewear of the brake linings. If the fluidlevel is excessively low, have thebrake system checked by anAuthorised Kia Dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid.(Refer to “Recommended Lubricants”in chapter 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.Checking clutch fluid level (if equipped) Check the fluid level in the reservoirperiodically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.Before removing the reservoir capand adding clutch fluid, clean thearea around the reservoir cap thor-oughly to prevent clutch fluid con-tamination.

OED076023 OED076057R

WARNINGIn the event the brake systemrequires frequent additions offluid, the vehicle should beinspected by an Authorised KiaDealer.

7 31

Maintenance

If the level is low, add fluid to theMAX level. If the fluid level is exces-sively low, have the clutch systemchecked by an Authorised KiaDealer.

Use only the specified clutch fluid.(Refer to “Recommended Lubricants”in chapter 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

CAUTIONDo not allow brake/clutch fluidto contact the vehicle's bodypaint, as paint damage willresult. Brake/clutch fluid, whichhas been exposed to open airfor an extended time shouldnever be used as its quality can-not be guaranteed. It should bethrown out. Don't put in thewrong kind of fluid. For exam-ple, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, inyour brake clutch system candamage brake clutch systemparts.

WARNINGWhen changing and addingbrake/clutch fluid, handle itcarefully. Do not let it come incontact with your eyes. Ifbrake/clutch fluid should comein contact with your eyes, imme-diately flush them with a largequantity of fresh tap water. Haveyour eyes examined by a doctoras soon as possible.

WARNINGIn the event the clutch systemrequires frequent additions offluid, the vehicle should beinspected by an Authorised KiaDealer.

Maintenance

327

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking the automatictransaxle fluid levelThe automatic transaxle fluid levelshould be checked regularly.Keep the vehicle on level ground withthe parking brake applied and checkthe fluid level according to the follow-ing procedure.

1. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral)position and confirm the engine isrunning at normal idle speed.

2. After the transaxle is warmed upsufficiently [(fluid temperature70~80°C (158~176°F)], for exam-ple by 10 minutes usual driving,move the shift lever through allpositions then place the shift leverin N (Neutral) or P (Park) position.

3. Confirm if the fluid level is in the"HOT" range on the level gauge. Ifthe fluid level is lower, add thespecified fluid from the fill hole. Ifthe fluid level is higher, drain thefluid from the drain hole.

4. If the fluid level is checked in coldcondition [(fluid temperature20~30°C (68~86°F)], add the fluidto the "COLD" line and thenrecheck the fluid level according tothe above step 2.

OED076025 OHD076045N

COLD

HOT

7 33

Maintenance

✽✽ NOTICE“COLD” scale is for reference onlyand should NOT be used to deter-mine transaxle fluid level.

✽✽ NOTICENew automatic transaxle fluidshould be red. The red dye is addedso the assembly plant can identify itas automatic transaxle fluid and dis-tinguish it from engine oil orantifreeze. The red dye, which is notan indicator of fluid quality, is notpermanent. As the vehicle is driven,the automatic transaxle fluid willbegin to look darker. The colourmay eventually appear light brown.Therefore, have an Authorised Kiadealer change the automatictransaxle fluid according to theScheduled Maintenance at thebeginning of this section.

Changing the automatictransaxle fluidHave automatic transaxle fluidchanged by an authorised KIA deal-er according to the MaintenanceSchedule at the beginning of thissection.

CAUTION• Low fluid level causes

transaxle slippage. Overfillingcan cause foaming, loss offluid and transaxle malfunc-tion.

• The use of a non-specifiedfluid could result in transaxlemalfunction and failure.

WARNING - Parking brakeTo avoid sudden movement ofthe vehicle, apply parking brakeand depress the brake pedalbefore moving the shift lever.

WARNINGThe transaxle fluid level shouldbe checked when the engine isat normal operating tempera-ture. This means that theengine, radiator, radiator hoseand exhaust system etc., arevery hot. Exercise great care notto burn yourself during this pro-cedure.

Maintenance

347

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

Checking the washer fluidlevel The reservoir is translucent so thatyou can check the level with a quickvisual inspection.Check the fluid level in the washerfluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-sary. Plain water may be used ifwasher fluid is not available.However, use washer solvent withantifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

Body lubrication All moving points of the body, suchas door hinges, bonnet hinges, andlocks, should be lubricated each timethe engine oil is changed. Use a non-freezing lubricant on locks duringcold weather.Make sure the engine bonnet sec-ondary latch keeps the bonnet fromopening when the primary latch isreleased.

OED076026

WARNING• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility whensprayed on the windscreenand may cause loss of vehiclecontrol or damage to paintand body trim.

• Windscreen washer fluidagents contain some amountsof alcohol and can be flamma-ble under certain circum-stances. Do not allow sparksor flame to contact the washerfluid or the washer fluid reser-voir. Damage to the vehicle orit's occupants could occur.

• Windscreen washer fluid ispoisonous to humans and ani-mals. Do not drink and avoidcontacting windscreen wash-er fluid. Serious injury ordeath could occur.

7 35

Maintenance

FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)The fuel filter for diesel engine playsan important role of separating waterfrom fuel and accumulating the waterin its bottom.If water accumulates in the fuel filter,the warning light comes on when theignition key is in the “ON” position.

If the light is turned on, takeyour car to the authorisedKia dealer and have drainthe water and checked thesystem.

Extracting air in the fuel filter(1.6L Diesel engine)If you drove until you have no fuel leftor if you replaced the fuel filter, besure to extract air in the fuel systemas it makes you difficult to start theengine.1. Remove the air extract nozzle cap

on the fuel filter.2. Pump up and down until the fuel

flows out of the plug opening.

✽✽ NOTICE• Use cloths when you extract air so

that the fuel is not sprayedaround.

• Clean the fuel around the fuel fil-ter or the injection pump beforestarting the engine to prevent fire.

• Finally, check each part if the fuelis leaking.

CAUTIONIf the water accumulated in thefuel filter is not drained at prop-er times, damages to the majorparts such as the fuel systemcan be caused by water perme-ation in the fuel filter.

OED076009

Maintenance

367

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement It must be replaced when necessary.

1. Loosen the air cleaner coverattaching clips and open the cover.

2. Replace the air cleaner filter.3. Lock the cover with the cover

attaching clips.

OED076028 OED076029 OED076030

7 37

Maintenance

Replace the filter according to theScheduled Maintenance Section.If the vehicle is operated in extreme-ly dusty or sandy areas, replace thefilter more often than the usual rec-ommended intervals. (Refer toMaintenance Under Severe UsageConditions in this section.)

CAUTION• Do not drive with the air clean-

er removed; this will result inexcessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleanerfilter, be careful that dust ordirt does not enter the airintake, or damage may result.

• Use a KIA genuine part. Use ofnon-genuine part could dam-age the air flow sensor or tur-bocharger.

Maintenance

387

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dustor other pollutants that come into thevehicle from the outside through theheating and air conditioning system.If dust or other pollutants accumulatein the filter over a period of time, theair flow from the air vents maydecrease, resulting in moisture accu-mulation on the inside of the wind-screen even when the outside (fresh)are position is selected. If this hap-pens, have the climate control air fil-ter replaced by an Authorised KiaDealer.

The climate control air filter shouldbe replaced every 15,000 km (DieselEngine 20,000 km). If the vehicle isoperated in the severely air-pollutedcities or on dusty rough roads for along period, it should be inspectedmore frequently and replaced earlier.When you try to replace the climatecontrol air filter by owner mainte-nance, replace it performing the fol-lowing procedure, and in this case,be careful to avoid damaging othercomponents.

Filter replacement1. With the glove box open, remove

the stoppers on both sides to allowthe glove box hang freely on thehinges.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core

OED076032R

7 39

Maintenance

2. Open the glove box part way,reach inside and pull out the elas-tic line and push the retaining clipthrough the hole on the side of theglove box. Allow the glove box toopen.

3. Pull out the cover pressing thehooks of the climate control air fil-ter case.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.5. Reassemble in the reverse order

of disassembly.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen replacing the climate controlair filter install it properly. Otherwise, the system may producenoise and the effectiveness of the fil-ter may be reduced.

OED076033R OED076034OED076031R

Maintenance

407

WIPER BLADES Wiper blade maintenance ✽✽ NOTICECommercial hot waxes applied byautomatic car washes have beenknown to make the windscreen diffi-cult to clean.

Contamination of either the wind-screen or the wiper blades with for-eign matter can reduce the effective-ness of the windscreen wipers.Common sources of contaminationare insects, tree sap, and hot waxtreatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are notwiping properly, clean both the win-dow and the blades with a goodcleaner or mild detergent, and rinsethoroughly with clean water.

Windscreen wiper bladereplacement When the wipers no longer cleanadequately, the blades may be wornor cracked, and require replacement.

1. Turn the ignition swich off andremove the key.

2. Push the wiper lever downward tothe one touch wiper position formore than 2 seconds, then thewiper blades will stop upwardposition. (if equipped)

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use petrol,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperarms or other components, donot attempt to move the wipersmanually.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specifiedwiper blade could result inwiper malfunction and failure.

OED046039R

7 41

Maintenance

3. Raise the wiper arm and turn thewiper blade assembly to exposethe plastic locking clip.

✽✽ NOTICEDo not allow the wiper arm to fallagainst the windscreen.

4. Compress the clip and slide theblade assembly upward.

5. Lift it off the arm.

6. Install the blade assembly until itclicks into place.

7. Place back the wiper arm to theproper position.

OEN076049 OEN076047 OEN076048

Maintenance

427

Rear window wiper blade replacement (if equipped) 1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out

the wiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly byinserting the centre part into theslot in the wiper arm until it clicksinto place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly isinstalled firmly by trying to pullingit slightly.

4. Place back the wiper arm to theproper position.

OED076041OED076040

7 43

Maintenance

BATTERY

For best battery service :• Keep the battery securely mount-

ed.• Keep the battery top clean and dry.• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated withpetroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte fromthe battery immediately with asolution of water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to beused for an extended time, discon-nect the battery cables.

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the follow-ing instructions carefullywhen handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettesand all other flames orsparks away from thebattery.

Hydrogen, which is ahighly combustible gas,is always present in bat-tery cells and mayexplode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of thereach of childrenbecause batteries con-tain highly corrosiveSULFURIC ACID. Do notallow battery acid to con-tact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

(Continued)

If any electrolyte getsinto your eyes, flush youreyes with clean water forat least 15 minutes andget immediate medicalattention. If possible,continue to apply waterwith a sponge or clothuntil medical attention isreceived.If electrolyte gets onyour skin, thoroughlywash the contacted area.If you feel a pain or aburning sensation, getmedical attention imme-diately.

Wear eye protectionwhen charging or work-ing near a battery.Always provide ventila-tion when working in anenclosed space.

(Continued)

OED076042

Maintenance

447

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged

in a short time (because, for exam-ple, the headlights or interior lightswere left on whilst the vehicle wasnot in use), recharge it by slowcharging (trickle) for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load whilstthe vehicle is being used, rechargeit at 20-30A for two hours.

(Continued)• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure onthe case may cause batteryacid to leak, resulting in per-sonal injury. Lift with a batterycarrier or with your hands onopposite corners.

• Never attempt to charge thebattery when the batterycables are connected.

• The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage.Never touch these compo-nents with the engine runningor the ignition switched on.

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precau-tions:• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed inan area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes,sparks, or flame near the bat-tery.

• Watch the battery duringcharging, and stop or reducethe charging rate if the batterycells begin gassing (boiling)violently or if the temperatureof the electrolyte of any cellexceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection whenchecking the battery duringcharging.

(Continued)

7 45

Maintenance

Reset itemsItems should be reset after the bat-tery has been discharged or the bat-tery has been disconnected.• Auto up/down window

(See chapter 3)• Sunroof (See chapter 3)• Trip computer (See chapter 4)• Climate control system

(See chapter 4)• Clock (See chapter 3, 4)• Audio (See chapter 3)

(Continued)• Disconnect the battery charg-

er in the following order.1. Turn off the battery charger

main switch.2. Unhook the negative clamp

from the negative battery ter-minal.

3. Unhook the positive clampfrom the positive battery ter-minal.

WARNING • Before performing mainte-

nance or recharging the bat-tery, turn off all accessoriesand stop the engine.

• The negative battery cablemust be removed first andinstalled last when the batteryis disconnected.

Maintenance

467

TYRES AND WHEELS Tyres care For proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tyreinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tyre infla-tion pressures All tyre pressures (including thespare) should be checked every daywhen the tyres are cold. “Cold Tyres”means the vehicle has not been driv-en for at least three hours or drivenless than 1.6 km (one mile).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, top vehi-cle handling, and minimum tyrewear.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the front driver’s door sill.

WARNINGSevere underinflation (70 kPa(10 psi) or more) can lead tosevere heat build-up, especiallyon hot days and when driving athigh speed. This can potentiallycause tread separation andother tyre irregularities toappear that can result in theloss of vehicle control leadingto severe injury or death.

CAUTION• Warm tyres normally exceed

recommended cold tyre pres-sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6psi). Do not release air fromwarm tyres to adjust the pres-sure or the tyres will be under-inflated.

• Underinflation results inexcessive wear, poor han-dling, reduced fuel economy,and the possibility ofblowouts from overheatedtyres. Also, low tyre pressurecan cause poor sealing of thetyre bead. If the tyre pressureis excessively low, wheeldeformation and/or tyre sepa-ration is possible. So, keepyour tyre pressures at theproper levels. If a tyre fre-quently needs refilling, have itchecked by an Authorised KiaDealer.

(Continued)

OED056006R

7 47

Maintenance

Checking tyre inflation pres-sureCheck your tyres once a month ormore.Also, check the tyre pressure of thespare tyre.

How to checkUse a good quality gage to checktyre pressure. You can not tell if yourtyres are properly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tyres maylook properly inflated even whenthey're underinflated.Check the tyre's inflation pressurewhen the tyres are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

WARNING - Tyre InflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tyre life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, and leadto sudden tyre failure. Thiscould result in loss of vehiclecontrol.

(Continued)• Overinflation produces a

harsh ride, handling prob-lems, excessive wear at thecentre of the tyre tread, and agreater possibility of damagefrom road hazards.

• Be sure to reinstall the tyreinflation valve caps. Withoutthe valve cap, dirt or moisturecould get into the valve coreand cause air leakage. If thecap have been lost, install newone as soon as possible.

CAUTION - Tyre pres-sure

Always observe the following:• Check tyre pressure when the

tyres are cold. (After vehiclehas been parked for at leastthree hours or hasn't beendriven more than 1.6 km (onemile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of yourspare tyre each time youcheck the pressure of othertyres.

• Never overload your vehicle.Be careful not to overload avehicle luggage rack if yourvehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tyres can causeaccidents. If your tread isbadly worn, or if your tyreshave been damaged, replacethem.

Maintenance

487

Remove the valve cap from the tyrevalve stem. Press the tyre gage firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tyre infla-tion pressure matches the recom-mended pressure on the tyre andloading information label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If the pres-sure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.If you overfill the tyre, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecentre of the tyre valve. Recheck thetyre pressure with the tyre gage. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

Tyre rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tyres be rotatedevery 12,000 km (7,500 miles) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tyres forcorrect balance.When rotating tyres, check foruneven wear and damage. Abnormalwear is usually caused by incorrecttyre pressure, improper wheel align-ment, out-of-balance wheels, severebraking or severe cornering. Look forbumps or bulges in the tread or sideof tyre. Replace the tyre if you findeither of these conditions. Replacethe tyre also if you can see fabric orcord. After rotation, be sure to bringthe front and rear tyre pressures tospecification and check lug nut tight-ness.Refer to Section 8, Specifications.

CBGQ0706

CBGQ0707

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tyre

With a full-size spare tyre

Directional tyres (if equipped)

7 49

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tyres are rotated.

✽✽ NOTICERotate radial tyres that have anasymmetric tread pattern only fromfront to rear and not from right toleft.

Tyre replacementIf the tyre is worn evenly, a treadwear indicator will appear as a solidband across the tread. This showsthere is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch)of tread left on the tyre. Replace thetyre when this happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tyre.

Wheel alignment and tyre balance The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tyrelife and best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tyrewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

WARNING • Do not use the compact spare

tyre for tyre rotation• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tyres under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

CAUTIONImproper wheel weights candamage your vehicle's alu-minum wheels. Use onlyapproved wheel weights.

Maintenance

507

Compact spare tyre replacement(if equipped)A compact spare tyre has a shortertread life than a regular size tyre.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tyre.The replacement compact spare tyreshould be the same size and designtyre as the one provided with yournew vehicle and should be mountedon the same compact spare tyrewheel. The compact spare tyre is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetyre wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tyre.

WARNING• When replacing tyres, never

mix radial, bias-belted, andbias-type tyres. All four tyresshould be of the same size,design and construction. Useonly the tyre sizes listed onthe Tyre Label found below thedoor striker on the driver’sside. Make sure that all tyresand wheels are the same sizeand have the same load-carry-ing capacity. Use only tyre andwheel combinations recom-mended on the Tyre Label orby an Authorised Kia Dealer.Failure to follow these precau-tions can adversely affect thesafety and handling of yourvehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)• The use of any other tyre size

or type may seriously affectride, handling, ground clear-ance, tyre clearance, andspeedometer calibration.

• Driving on worn-out tyres isvery hazardous and willreduce braking effectiveness,steering accuracy, and trac-tion.

• It is best to replace all fourtyres at the same time. If thatis not possible, or necessary,then replace the two front ortwo rear tyres as a pair.Replacing just one tyre canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling.

7 51

Maintenance

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

Tyre tractionTyre traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tyres, tyres that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tyres should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. To reduce the possibility oflosing control, slow down wheneverthere is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tyre maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetyre wear. If you find a tyre is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.When you have new tyres installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtyre life. Additionally, a tyre shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

Tyre sidewall labelingThis information identifies anddescribes the fundamental charac-teristics of the tyre and also providesthe tyre identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. TheTIN can be used to identify the tyre incase of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

WARNINGA wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handlingcharacteristics, ground clear-ance, body-to-tyre clearance,snow chain clearance,speedometer calibration, head-light aim and bumper height.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7

Maintenance

527

2. Tyre size designation A tyre’s sidewall is marked with a tyresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tyres for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and num-bers in the tyre size designationmean.Example tyre size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tyre size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)P205/65R15 92H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tyresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengercars or light trucks; however, notall tyres have this marking).

205 - Tyre width in millimeters.65 - Aspect ratio. The tyre’s section

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tyre construction code (Radial).15 - Rim diameter in inches.

92 - Load Index, a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tyre can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:6.0JX15

6.0 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.15 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tyre speed ratings The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger cars. The speedrating is part of the tyre size desig-nation on the sidewall of the tyre.This symbol corresponds to thattyre's designed maximum safe oper-ating speed.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)T 190 km/h (118 mph)H 210 km/h (130 mph)V 240 km/h (149 mph)Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

W* 270 km/h (168 mph)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

* W speed rating is sub-category of the Zspeed rating.

7 53

Maintenance

3. Checking tyre life (TIN : TyreIdentification Number)

Any tyres that are over 6 years,based on the manufacturing date,tyre strength and performance,decline with age naturally (evenunused spare tyres). Therefore, thetyres (including the spare tyre)should be replaced by new ones.Youcan find the manufacturing date onthe tyre sidewall (possibly on theinside of the wheel), displaying theDOT Code. The DOT Code is aseries of numbers on a tyre consist-ing of numbers and English letters.The manufacturing date is designat-ed by the last four digits (characters)of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tyre size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1606 representsthat the tyre was produced in the16th week of 2006.

4. Tyre ply composition and mate-rial

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric are in the tyre. Tyremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tyre, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tyre. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tyre and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tyre. Whenreplacing the tyres on the vehicle,always use a tyre that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtyre.

WARNING - Tyre ageA tyre more than 6 years oldmay sustain separation of cordlayers inside the tyre. Tyre fail-ure to separation of cord, cancause accidents resulting insevere injuries or death.Make sure to check the manu-facturing date of the tyre andreplace it within 6 years of thatdate.

Maintenance

547

7. Uniform tyre quality gradingTread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tyre when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tyregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the governmentcourse as a tyre graded 100.The relative performance of tyresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use. However, performancemay differ from the norm because ofvariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicletyres.The tyres available as standardor optional equipment on your vehi-cles may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thegrades represent the tyres ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tyre markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.

Temperature -A, B & C The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C. The grades repre-sent the tyre’s resistance to the gen-eration of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tyre todegenerate and reduce tyre life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tyre failure. Grades A and Brepresent higher levels of perform-ance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by thelaw.

WARNING - Tyre temperature

The temperature grade for thistyre is established for a tyre thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible suddentyre failure. This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.

7 55

Maintenance

BULB REPLACEMENT

Use only the bulbs of the specifiedwattage.

✽✽ NOTICEAfter heavy, driving rain or washing,headlight and taillight lenses couldappear frosty. This condition iscaused by the temperature differencebetween the lamp inside and outside.This is similar to the condensation onyour windows inside your vehicleduring the rain and doesn’t indicatea problem with your vehicle. If thewater leaks into the lamp bulb cir-cuitry, have the vehicle checked byan Authorised Kia Dealer.

WARNING - Working onthe lights

Prior to working on the light,firmly apply the parking brake,ensure that the ignition switchis turned to the “LOCK” positionand turn off the lights to avoidsudden movement of the vehi-cle and burning your fingers orreceiving an electric shock.

CAUTIONBe sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the samewattage rating. Otherwise, itmay cause damage to the fuseor electric wiring system.

CAUTIONIf you don’t have necessarytools, the correct bulbs and theexpertise, consult an AuthorisedKia Dealer. In many cases, it isdifficult to replace vehicle lightbulbs because other parts of thevehicle must be removed beforeyou can get to the bulb. This isespecially true if you have toremove the front bumper to get tothe bulb(s). Removing/installingthe front bumper or bumper hard-ware can result in damage to thevehicle.

Maintenance

567

(1) Position light (Parking light)(2) Headlight (High)(3) Headlight (Low)(4) Front turn signal light(5) Front fog light (if equipped)

Headlight bulb replacement If the light bulb is not operating, havethe vehicle checked by an authorisedKia Dealer.

WARNING - Halogen bulbs• Halogen bulbs contain pres-

surized gas that will produceflying pieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully,and avoid scratches and abra-sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoidcontact with liquids. Nevertouch the glass with barehands. Residual oil may causethe bulb to overheat and burstwhen lit. A bulb should beoperated only when installedin a headlight.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediate-ly and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection whenchanging a bulb. Allow thebulb to cool down before han-dling it.

OHD076046OED076044

7 57

Maintenance

Front turn signal/position lightbulb replacement1. Open the bonnet.2. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe assembly.

3. Remove the bulb from the socketby pressing it in and rotating it untilthe tabs on the bulb align with theslots in the socket. Pull the bulbout of the socket.

4. Insert a new bulb by inserting itinto the socket and rotating it untilit locks into place.

5. Install the socket in the assemblyby aligning the tabs on the socketwith the slots in the assembly.Insert the socket into the assemblyand turn the socket clockwise.

Front fog light bulb replace-mentIf the light bulb is not operating, havethe vehicle checked by an authorisedKia Dealer.

OED076045

Maintenance

587

Interior lights bulb replace-ment1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

gently pry the lens from the interi-or light housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snapthe lens into place.

WARNING Prior to working on the InteriorLights, ensure that the “OFF”button is depressed to avoidburning your fingers or receiv-ing an electric shock.

OED076046

OED076047

Front map lamp

Centre dome lampOED076049R

OED076050

Glove box lamp

Luggage room lamp

7 59

Maintenance

License plate lights bulbreplacement 1. Loosen the lens retaining screws

with a cross-tip screwdriver.2. Remove the lens.3. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.4. Install a new bulb.5. Reinstall the lens securely with the

lens retaining screws.

(1) Rear fog light (if equipped)(2) Rear turn signal light(3) Back-up light(4) Stop and tail light

Rear combination light bulbreplacement1. Open the rear hatch.

2. Remove the service cover by turn-ing the plastic screw counterclock-wise and removing the cover.

OED076051 OED076053OED076052

Maintenance

607

3. Remove the socket from theassembly by turning the socketcounterclockwise until the tabs onthe socket align with the slots onthe assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socketby pressing it in and rotating it untilthe tabs on the bulb align with theslots in the socket. Pull the bulbout of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting itinto the socket and rotating it untilit locks into place.

6. Install the socket in the assemblyby aligning the tabs on the socketwith the slots in the assembly.Push the socket into the assemblyand turn the socket clockwise.

7. Reinstall the service cover andtighten the screws.

High mounted stop light bulbreplacementIf the light bulb is not operating, havethe vehicle checked by an authorisedKia Dealer.

1LDA5037OED076054 OED076055

7 61

Maintenance

Side repeater light bulbreplacement (if equipped) 1. Remove the light assembly from

the vehicle by pushing the lens for-ward and pulling the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical con-nector.

3. Separate the socket and the lensparts by turning the socket count-er clockwise until the tabs on thesocket align with the slots on thelens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.6. Reassemble the socket and the

lens part.7. Connect the bulb electrical con-

nector.8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

OHD076036

Maintenance

627

EXTERIOR CARE Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warningand caution statements that appearon the label.

Finish maintenanceWashing To help protect your vehicle’s finishfrom rust and deterioration, wash itthoroughly and frequently at leastonce a month with lukewarm or coldwater.If you use your vehicle for off-roaddriving, you should wash it after eachoff-road trip. Pay special attention tothe removal of any accumulation ofsalt, dirt, mud, and other foreignmaterials. Make sure the drain holesin the lower edges of the doors androcker panels are kept clear andclean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similardeposits can damage your vehicle’sfinish if not removed immediately.Even prompt washing with plainwater may not completely remove allthese deposits. A mild soap, safe foruse on painted surfaces, may beused.After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water.Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-ish. CAUTION

• Water washing in the enginecompartment may cause thefailure of electrical circuitslocated in the engine compart-ment.

• Never allow water or other liq-uids to come in contact withelectrical/electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle asthis may damage them.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, testthe brakes whilst driving slowlyto see if they have been affectedby water. If braking performanceis impaired, dry the brakes byapplying them lightly whilstmaintaining a slow forwardspeed.

CAUTIONDo not use strong soap, chemi-cal detergents or hot water, anddo not wash the vehicle in directsunlight or when the body of thevehicle is warm.

7 63

Maintenance

WaxingWax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehiclebefore waxing. Use a good qualityliquid or paste wax, and follow themanufacturer’s instructions. Wax allmetal trim to protect it and to main-tain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-als with a spot remover will usuallystrip the wax from the finish. Be sureto re-wax these areas even if the restof the vehicle does not yet need wax-ing.

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quicklyrust and may develop into a majorrepair expense.

✽✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged andrequires any metal repair orreplacement, be sure the body shopapplies anti-corrosion materials tothe parts repaired or replaced.

CAUTION• Wiping dust or dirt off the

body with a dry cloth willscratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abra-sive cleaners, or strong deter-gents containing highly alka-line or caustic agents onchrome-plated or anodizedaluminum parts. This mayresult in damage to the pro-tective coating and cause dis-coloration or paint deteriora-tion.

Maintenance

647

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper orother sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal parts from corrosion, apply acoating of wax or chrome preser-vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal partswith a heavier coating of wax orpreservative. If necessary, coat theparts with non-corrosive petroleumjelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenanceCorrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control maycollect on the underbody. If thesematerials are not removed, acceler-ated rusting can occur on underbodyparts such as the fuel lines, frame,floor pan and exhaust system, eventhough they have been treated withrust protection.Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-body and wheel openings with luke-warm or cold water once a month,after off-road driving and at the endof each winter. Pay special attentionto these areas because it is difficultto see all the mud and dirt. It will domore harm than good to wet downthe road grime without removing it.The lower edges of doors, rockerpanels, and frame members havedrain holes that should not beallowed to clog with dirt; trappedwater in these areas can cause rust-ing.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, testthe brakes whilst driving slowlyto see if they have been affectedby water. If braking performanceis impaired, dry the brakes byapplying them lightly whilstmaintaining a slow forwardspeed.

7 65

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coatedwith a clear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,

polishing compound, solvent, orwire brushes on aluminum wheels.They may scratch or damage thefinish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutraldetergent, and rinse thoroughlywith water. Also, be sure to cleanthe wheels after driving on saltedroads. This helps prevent corro-sion.

• Avoid washing the wheels withhigh-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any acid detergent. Itmay damage and corrode the alu-minum wheels coated with a clearprotective finish.

Maintenance

667

INTERIOR CARE Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such asperfume and cosmetic oil from con-tacting the dashboard and door trimbecause they may cause damage ordiscoloration. If they do contact thedashboard, wipe them off immedi-ately. See the instructions that followfor the proper way to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery andinterior trim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt fromvinyl with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with avinyl cleaner.

Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-ric with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-tion recommended for upholstery orcarpets. Remove fresh spots imme-diately with a fabric spot cleaner. Iffresh spots do not receive immediateattention, the fabric can be stainedand its colour can be affected. Also,its fire-resistant properties can bereduced if the material is not proper-ly maintained.

Cleaning the lap/shoulder beltwebbing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended forcleaning upholstery or carpet. Followthe instructions provided with thesoap. Do not bleach or re-dye thewebbing because this may weakenit.

Cleaning the interior windowglass If the interior glass surfaces of thevehicle become fogged (that is, cov-ered with an oily, greasy or waxyfilm), they should be cleaned withglass cleaner. Follow the directionson the glass cleaner container.

CAUTIONUsing anything but recommend-ed cleaners and proceduresmay affect the fabric’s appear-ance and fire-resistant proper-ties.

CAUTIONIf wax for synthetic leather con-tacts the dashboard and doortrim, it may cause stain and blot.

CAUTIONDo not scrape or scratch theinside of the rear window. Thismay result in damage to the rearwindow defroster grid.

8

Specifications / 8-2

Specifications

Inflation pressure

bar (psi,kPa)

Front Rear Front Rear

185/65R15 5.5J×15

195/65R15 5.5J×15 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2

205/55R16 6.0J×16 (32, 220) (32, 220)(32, 220) (32, 220)

225/45R17 7.0J×17

T125/80D15 5.5J×154.2 4.2 4.2 4.2

(60, 420) (60, 420)(60, 420) (60, 420)

Specifications

28

Item mm (in)

Overall length 4235 (166.7)

Overall width 1790 (70.5)

Overall height 1480 (58.3)

Front tread 1546*1/1538*2/1528*3 (60.9*1/60.6*2/60.2*3)

Rear tread 1544*1/1536*2/1527*3 (60.8*1/60.5*2/60.1*3)

Wheelbase 2650 (104.3)

SPECIFICATIONSThe specifications given here are for general information only. Please check with an authorised Kia dealer for moreprecise and more up-to-date information.

Full size tyre

Compact spare tyre (if equipped)

Normal load *1 Maximum load

Wheel lug nut torque

kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)

9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

Dimensions

Tyres

*¹ Normal load : Up to 4 persons

ItemTyre

size

Wheel

size

*1 Fitted with 185/65R15 or 195/65R15 tyres.*2 Fitted with 205/55R16 tyres.*3 Fitted with 225/45R17 tyres.

8 3

Specifications

Light Bulb Wattage

HeadlightsHigh 55Low 55

Front turn signal lights 21Position lights 5Side repeater lights (if equipped) 5Front fog lights (if equipped) 55Stop and tail lights 21/5Rear turn signal lights 21Back-up lights 21Rear fog lights (if equipped) 21High mounted stop light 2License plate lights 5Front map lamp 10Centre dome lamp 8Door courtesy lamps 5Luggage room lamp 5Glove box lamp 5

Light bulbs

Specifications

48

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing

the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’stime, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Recommended lubricants and capacities To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

Lubricant Volume Classification3.3 l (3.5 US qt.) API Service SJ, SL or above,4.0 l (4.2 US qt.) ILSAC GF-3 or above

5.3 l (5.6 US qt.)Without CPF (Catalyzed Particulate filter); API Service CH-4 or above, ACEA B4

5.9 l (6.2 US qt.) With CPF (Catalyzed Particulate filter); ACEA C31.9 l (2.0 US qt.)2.0 l (2.1 US qt.) API Service GL-4

2.0 l (2.11 US qt.) SAE 75W-85 (fill for-life)2.10 l (2.22 US qt.)

Automatic transaxle fluid6.8 l (7.2 US qt.) DIAMOND ATF SP-III, 6.6 l (6.9 US qt.) SK ATF SP-III

Power steering 0.8 l (0.8 US qt.) PSF-III5.8~5.9 l (6.1~6.2 US qt.)

Coolant6.2~6.3 l (6.6~6.7 US qt.) Ethylene glycol base for

6.3 l (6.7 US qt.) aluminum radiator7.3 l (7.7 US qt.)

Brake/Clutch fluid 0.7~0.8 l (0.7~0.8 US qt.) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4Fuel 53 l (14 US gal) -

Engine oil *1 *2

(drain and refill)

Manual transaxlefluid

PetrolEngine

DieselEngine

1.4L/1.6L2.0L

2.0L

1.6L

2.0L Engine

1.4L/1.6 Engine

PetrolEngine 2.0L

DieselEngine

1.6L2.0L

1.4L/1.6L

PetrolEngine 2.0L

DieselEngine

1.6L2.0L

1.4L/1.6L

8 5

Specifications

Recommended SAE viscositynumber

✽✽ NOTICEAlways be sure to clean the areaaround any filler plug, drain plug,or dipstick before checking or drain-ing any lubricant. This is especiallyimportant in dusty or sandy areasand when the vehicle is used onunpaved roads. Cleaning the plugand dipstick areas will prevent dirtand grit from entering the engineand other mechanisms that could bedamaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Petrol Engine Oil *1

°C(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

DieselEngine Oil

10W-30

15W-40

0W-30 *2

5W-30

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20,5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3). However, if the engine oil is not available in your coun-try, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

2. It is only for extreme cold area and to be restricted by driving condition and area.(Especially, not recommended for sustained high loaded and high speed operation.)

20W-50

10W-30

15W-40

5W-20, 5W-30

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and coldweather operating (starting and oil flow). Lower viscosity engine oils can pro-vide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher vis-cosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result inengine damage.When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will beoperated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommendedoil viscosity from the chart.

9Index

Index

29

Air bag - supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . 3-53Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10, 7-32

Back warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43Before driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Bonnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Brakes and clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55

Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Electrical circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Electronic stability program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4, 7-23Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . 7-16Exterior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

A

B

C

D

F

E

G

H

9 3

Index

If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4If you have a flat tyre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Immobiliser system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7In case of an emergency whilst driving . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Information monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Label information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53Lubricants and fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34Luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Maintenance under severe usage conditions

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82Mounting bracket for roof carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99

Normal maintenance schedulePetrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Road warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

I

K

L

N

M

O

R

Index

49

Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87Suggestions for economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93

Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16Trailer towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Tyre pressure monitoring system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21Tyres and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle run-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Windscreen defrosting and defogging . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

T

V

S W

Documents

kia, the company · kia, the company Now that you are the owner of a Kia Vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of questions about your vehicle and the company like